Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled.Type: Each family can have several types. In the following illustration. A type can also be a style. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. click . Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). making it easy to understand what each button represents. The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. such as a 30” X 42” title block. In the steps that follow. the user interface is labeled. specifically its clear user interface. A type can be a specific size of a family. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 . The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. This creates a new project based on the default template.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command.By default. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. Edit. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. and View. You then click the command name to run the command. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. In addition. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. While working in the drawing area. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. TIP For example. click Toolbar. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu.

notice the list of columns that are available. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. click Structural Wall. click Design Bars. click Structural Column. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. First. 6 On the Design Bar. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 . For example. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. if you intend to add a beam. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the left side of the Options Bar. You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model. notice a beam type is specified. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. click Beam. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. Within the drawing area. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed. If you select the Beam tool. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model.

You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. containing buttons grouped by function. click the tab. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. immediately below the Type Selector. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. 11 Click OK.

The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. select Views (all). Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 . In the Project Browser.

double-click the name. families. 14 On the Settings menu. 12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . You can right-click in the browser to add. 13 In the Type Selector. sheets. reports. families. elevations. The browser is also dockable. columns. family category (beams. scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. and groups. delete. walls). schedules. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and groups of your current project. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans. and group name. 3D).sign next to the name. and rename views. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . To open a view. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. click Browser Organization.

18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. In the bottom left corner of the window. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. Do not click. click Structural Wall. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. After you create a browser organization scheme." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 . notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Cancel. In this case. The cursor is displayed as a pencil.

Tooltips: To see tooltips. press SHIFT+F1. click . and click to get the topic associated with the window. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. When you place the cursor over a component. There are several tools that help you find information. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. The Status Bar also provides information. Click the Help button. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. 14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. press F1 to get help on that dialog. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. 20 Press TAB. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. You can use this tri-pane. regarding selected components within a view. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. In the Status Bar. Windows: From any window. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. If there is no Help button displayed. it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. You can also press SHIFT+F1. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. in conjunction with tooltips. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. find a keyword on the Index tab. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. After you are familiar with these tasks.

In the following steps. click Training Files. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window.Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. 3 In the Project Browser. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view. the view zooms out from the structural model. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). For example. In the drawing area. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

the view zooms in on the selected area. When you release the mouse button. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 8 Click in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.6 On the View toolbar. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . 7 Click Zoom To Fit. To modify or add snap increments. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. NOTE As you zoom in and out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.

click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). press ESC. and then using the Zoom tool again. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Move. 13 Click and hold the mouse button. 16 To exit the wheel. For more information about SteeringWheels. 18 On the Undo menu.11 To display SteeringWheels. and click Help. and click the SteeringWheels tab. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. select the second item in the list. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 . the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. As you move the mouse. In this example. moving the wheel to the desired location. on the View toolbar. . Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.

such as the Lines command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. or press CTRL+Z. On the Design Bar.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. and click again to end it. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . click the Undo command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. click Lines. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Press ESC twice. 21 To end the command. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line. 22 Close the file without saving your changes. Some commands. End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. on the Standard toolbar. click Modify. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines.

Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality. Creating a New Project In this first exercise. Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. beams. You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations. Structural Modelling In this lesson. using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. you create a 5-story steel structure. You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project. When you finish these tutorials. you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools. columns. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. Finally. beam systems. you will create and name a new steel project. You then add structural walls. and a concrete slab to the model. 19 .

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. On the Options Bar. Add levels 1 In the Project Browser. click Browse. 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click OK. you create additional levels for your structure. click Level. 4 In the New Project dialog. when a dashed line displays. and double-click North. 2 In the New Project dialog.rvt. click to create Level 3.rvt. Adding New Levels In this exercise. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. open the Imperial Templates folder. and for Offset. click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. select Structural Analysis-Default . Adding New Levels on page 20.1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. enter 12' 0". enter 12' 0". 20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click the Level 2 reference line. expand Elevations (Building Elevations).rte. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling. Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. ■ ■ In the drawing area.

you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4. each with the offset value set to 12' 0". 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21. 5 Press ESC. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 . and Level 5).

select Auto . For Positioning. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Notice that Level 2 is bold. Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser. click symbol as shown. click Training Files. and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning. Select Current view only. (Zoom In).dwg.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.Center to Center. and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file. select Black and White. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .rvt. For Colors. Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. 3 In the Import/Link dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Click Open.

. and on the Options Bar. click Query.5 Click the elevation symbol. Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. and click to place the symbol. 9 In the drawing area. click Hide in View. drag it beyond the dimensions. select a single column. 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing. and in the Import Instance Query dialog. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 . click drawing.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Column Grids In this exercise. 10 On the Toolbar.Notice that all columns disappear. 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Adding Column Grids on page 24. 3 On the Options Bar. (Undo). click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that it is labeled 2. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble. 4 Select the first horizontal grid line. Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). click . Notice that the grid line is highlighted. click Grid. you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. and press ENTER. Adding Column Grids | 25 . 12 Click the value within the grid bubble. click Grid. enter A. 7 On the Design Bar. click . 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. labels display in numerical sequence. 11 Select the first vertical grid line. the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing. NOTE When you select a grid line. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. As you select subsequent grid lines. click Modify.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. 10 On the Options Bar. and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off.

26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 15 On the Design Bar. and then OK. Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. click Modify. Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical.dwg file. The last grid line is labeled G. Click Apply.13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A. Under Halftone. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements. 17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan. 19 Enter ZF. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab.

21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Walls on page 27.rvt. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Structural Walls | 27 . Setup views 1 In the Project Browser. you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. i_RST_EW_Modelling. For the remainder of this tutorial. Adding Structural Walls In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. this view is referred to as the plan view.

3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 8 In the Type Selector. click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . and place the first structural wall as shown. click Structural Wall. this view is referred to as the 3D view. click center of the drawing. 6 On the View toolbar. click . Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view.2 On the View toolbar. . 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. For the remainder of this tutorial.8" Masonry. 4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. and enter ZF. select Finish Face: Exterior. 10 Using the drawing as a guide. click (3D). and for Loc Line. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall.

15 On the View Control Bar. place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft. click Modify. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Adding Structural Walls | 29 . View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges.12 Using the same method. 13 On the Design Bar.

30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure. 18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts. and using the architectural drawing as a guide.Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls. Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view.

Adding Structural Walls | 31 . (Mirror).19 On the Toolbar. click 20 Click grid D. The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side.

Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2. you add columns at specific grid intersections. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify. Adding Structural Columns on page 32.21 On the Design Bar. Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view.

click Structural Column. 2 On the View toolbar. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 . Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. .Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click structure.rvt. 5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column. place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5. Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown. 6 Using the same method. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. i_RST_EW_Modelling.

click Structural Column. 10 In the Type Selector. 12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. and enter ZF. click Modify. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Columns are placed at each grid intersection. 13 On the Toolbar. 11 On the Options Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 14 Click inside the 3D view. Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view.7 On the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. and enter ZF. click Finish. click (Grid Intersection).

click structure. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Beams | 35 . i_RST_EW_Modelling. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View toolbar. click Chain. 4 In the Type Selector. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view. click Beam. Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. . you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Structural Beams on page 35.

6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed. and then click to enter the beam startpoint. that is. enter 5' 0". press CTRL. Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. A5. and select the beam between A6 and A5. click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5. The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 10 Click the column at grid location A6. 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint. 8 Using the same method. place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure. and A6. and press ENTER.

Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. 14 In the Type Selector. Adding Structural Beams | 37 . and enter ZF. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. click .Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. This project does not require sloped beams. NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only. 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. click Beam. click . 11 On the Toolbar.

click Finish. 19 On the Design Bar. Beams are placed within the grid. . Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. 18 Click inside the 3D view. and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam. 20 Click inside the plan view. click through A5. and press DELETE. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and enter ZF. Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view. 21 On the View toolbar. click Modify.17 On the Options Bar.

select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. click . delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. 27 In the Type Selector. 25 On the View toolbar. between grid lines G2 and G5. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.23 Using the same method. and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. Adding Structural Beams | 39 . 29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. click Beam. 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide. 24 Click inside the plan view.

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5.30 Using the same method.

and press DELETE. click . 35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. 34 On the View toolbar. Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view. 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection. and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft. and on the Toolbar. Adding Structural Beams | 41 . click . Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view.31 Select the 3 new beams.

and enter ZF.36 On the View toolbar. and press DELETE. and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft. 37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2. click . 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 38 Click inside the 3D view.

. This is the endpoint for the first beam. 44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3. click Beam.Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . 42 In the Type Selector. 39 Click inside the plan view. 40 On the View toolbar. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall. This is the startpoint for the first beam. 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. click center of the structure. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam. 46 On the Design Bar. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and on the Toolbar. click Modify. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams. This is the endpoint for the third beam. click . This is the endpoint for the second beam.45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4. 48 Click the beam on grid line D .

52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. 51 Click inside the 3D view. Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise.50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. Adding Structural Beams | 45 .

55 On the Options Bar. enter -0' 5". Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted. and then click OK. Under Category. Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. Click Apply. click ■ ■ ■ . Under Category. select Other. For z-Direction Offset Value. 54 In the Filter dialog. select Structural Framing (Girder). under Constraints. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Click OK.53 On the Options Bar. do the following: Click Check None. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 56 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: For z-Direction Justification. select Structural Framing (Joist).

you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. and enter ZF. . click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view. Under Pattern. For Maximum Spacing. enter 9' 0". click of the structure. For Beam Type.rvt. select Maximum Spacing. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View toolbar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26.57 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Beam System. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 . Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47. for Layout Rule. Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. select 3D. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK.

10 Click inside the 3D view. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify. 8 Using the same settings and method. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure. 7 Click to place the beam system.The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. 9 On the Design Bar. and enter ZF. do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure. Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. Also. NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay.

and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. click Lines. and enter ZF. 3 On the Design Bar. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 . You are now in sketch mode. Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise. click Slab. Adding a Structural Slab on page 49.11 Click File menu ➤ Save. You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing.

4 On the View toolbar. . click structure. and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . If necessary. 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing. use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D. 6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing. When sketching the slab. and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines. zoom in and out as needed. and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections.

Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . 11 On the Toolbar. click . 10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines. 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection.Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF.

click Lines. . 16 On the Design Bar. click line D.13 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar. 14 Enter ZF. click Modify.

click Lines. and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. click structure. 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. 19 On the Design Bar. . and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . 22 On the View toolbar. 21 Enter ZF. 23 On the Design Bar. click grid line D. .18 On the View toolbar. click Lines.

. 31 On the Design Bar.25 On the Design Bar. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 26 Enter ZF. click structure. 27 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF. 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. click Lines.

Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise.In the Revit dialog. Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. beam systems.rvt. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. beams. and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom. you copy columns.

and enter ZF. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 4 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. select Walls. click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). do the following: For Top Constraint. 3 On the Options Bar. do the following: Click Check None. .Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. 5 On the Options Bar. Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. Under Category. click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. under Constraints. Click Apply. 2 Draw a selection box around the entire view. select Up to level: Level 5.

click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. and then click OK. and then click OK. Click Apply. click ■ ■ ■ . select Level 5. Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. select Structural Columns. and draw a selection box around the entire view. click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Select Levels dialog. 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. do the following: Click Check None. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . For Top Offset. . 10 On the Options Bar. do the following: For Top Level. Click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. Under Category. under Constraints. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view. Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view. 9 In the Filter dialog. select Level 3. enter 4' 0".

do the following: Click Check None. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. 24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Click OK. and then click OK. select Level 3 and Level 5. on the Options Bar. enter 0' 0'. click ■ ■ . For Top Offset. and draw a selection box around the entire structure. Structural Framing (Girder). Click Apply. click ■ ■ ■ . enter 4' 0". select Floors. 20 In the Filter dialog. click Modify. 23 In the Select Levels dialog.Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected. do the following: For Base Offset. 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Under Category. and then click OK. Structural Beam Systems. under Constraints. and Structural Framing (Joist). Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view. while pressing CTRL. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.

double-click Level 1. you add an isolated foundation under each structural column. Adding Foundations | 59 . Adding Foundations In this exercise. 2 Enter ZF.25 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Foundations on page 59. i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Structural Plans. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 8 On the Design Bar. click . All the structural columns are highlighted. The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure. click Modify. Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. 5 On the Options Bar.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18". Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. 7 On the Toolbar. click (Structural Column). 4 In the Type Selector.

The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions. 12 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 18 On the View toolbar. select 12" Foundation Slab. click Floor Properties. 17 On the Design Bar. for Type. and click OK. Adding Foundations | 61 . click Foundation ➤ Slab. 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. 14 On the Design Bar. Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and press DELETE.10 Select both footings. click Finish Sketch. (3D). click 19 Enter ZF. You are now in sketch mode.

and modify its line properties. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. you place it in an existing project sheet. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Structural Detailing In this lesson. You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section. you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file. Next. you create and annotate model-based details in a section view. Structural Detailing on page 62. You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial. You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet. Finally.

Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. click Training Files. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. ■ Click Save As.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. 5 In the New Drafting View dialog. but do not open it. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5. Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. click Training Files. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0".dwg. 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section.rvt. You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file.Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 . Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. do the following: ■ Select the Link option. Click OK. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD.

■ ■ For Colors. 11 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65. ■ Click Open. For Positioning. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. select Auto . and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. 9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit).Center to Center. select Black and White. Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights.

i_RST_EW_Detailing.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection. select 1/4" = 1'-0". do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. From the adjacent drop-down list of views. click . This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. Select the Reference other view option. 2 On the View toolbar. click Section. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1. Notice that Level 1 is bold.rvt. and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3. you create a section that references an existing detail view. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 . 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3.1.Unnamed. move the cursor down.rvt. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows). 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and double-click S. expand select Sheets (all). i_RST_EW_Detailing. and click inside the north wall to place the section.

Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 . click Level 1 on the sheet. and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser.Sheet S-1 . 6 Release the mouse button.Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. . expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 4 On the View toolbar. and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view.

68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 8 Click to place the detail.Notice the detail drawing outline. 7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet.

Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar. change it to S-1. notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number. and click ENTER.In the structural plan view of Level 1. and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 . click corner of the sheet. .0.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save. you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70. i_RST_EW_Detailing.In the structural plan view of Level 1. notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise.rvt. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.

2 Click on the detail drawing. 4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click . and double-click Typical Wall Section. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 . 3 On the Options Bar.Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser.

5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. select 4. for Weight. 8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 13 Click Apply. 12 Click OK. 14 Click OK. notice the Layer value CONT5. 11 In the Line Graphics dialog. 9 Click the CONT5 row. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. 6 Click OK. Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

i_RST_EW_Detailing. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click Training Files. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 . do the following: ■ ■ For Views.Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 . and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library. 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. select Show all views and sheets.TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 .rvt. 3 In the Insert Views dialog.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 .TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73.rvt. you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise. Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 .TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and drag 001 . 7 Click OK. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view. 12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise.4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 9 Release the mouse button. Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 11 Click to place the detail. 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet. Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 3 . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75.T.O. and close all other views. click . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise..S.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise. you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 . 2 On the View toolbar. Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle. 22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise. 20 In the Type Selector. as shown. 23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle. click Detail Component. select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”.Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

26 On the Toolbar.24 Click to place the bolt. 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. as shown. click Modify. Adding Detail Components | 93 . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Move).

as shown.28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle. 94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Adding Detail Components | 95 .29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle.

96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection.Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Selector. select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16. click Detail Component.

39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam. 35 Select the L-angle. Adding Detail Components | 97 . change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. as shown. click Modify. 36 On the Options Bar.33 Click to place the L-angle. and then click the lock for the alignment. click (Align). 34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam. as shown. . 42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. click 38 Click OK. 37 In the Element Properties dialog.

Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise.rvt. 98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . i_RST_EW_Detailing. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98. Add break lines 1 Enter ZF. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you will add break lines and annotation to the section view.43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise.

as shown. 4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. 6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. to the right of the coping detail. select Break Line. as shown. 5 Click to place the break line. The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 . 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise. as shown. click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab. 8 Click to place the break line. below the structural angle and expansion bolt.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click to place the break line. 14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line. click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line.10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise. 13 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

15 On the View Control Bar. Click to finish the second leader segment. Click to finish the first leader segment. 18 Click in the drawing area. away from the text box. Move the cursor to the right. ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN). Move the cursor up and to the right. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 . click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab. click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region). 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. click Text.

Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN). Click to finish the second leader segment. click Modify. 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right. Move the cursor to the right.19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. click (Add Left Leader). Click to finish the first leader segment. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 Click on the leader. 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . as shown.

25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box.24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 . as shown.

31 On the Options Bar. Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O. 27 On the Options Bar. Click to finish the second leader segment. 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Move the cursor down and to the right. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. INFO). EXPANSION ANCHORS. SECTIONS FOR REINF. click Text.C. 33 Click in the drawing area. 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. click Text. click 32 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). away from the text box. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA. Move the cursor to the right. Click to finish the first leader segment. Move the cursor to the left. (One Segment). 28 Click in the drawing area. away from the text box. Click to finish the leader segment.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND.

35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop. as shown. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 .34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box.

106 .

and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment. In the first lesson. 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. click Training Files. 107 . 7 In the New Project dialog. 4 In the Options dialog. and set it as your default template. selection default options. they are not saved to project or template files. and your username when using worksets.rte. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you modify the system environment. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. which is independent of the project settings. under Template file. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. click Browse. notification preferences. 9 In the New Project dialog. you create an office template. and click OK. journal cleanup options. Finally.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. In the second lesson. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. 5 Under Colors. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. These settings control the graphics. select Invert background color. click the Graphics tab. click OK. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. Notice that the drawing area is black. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project.

When an error occurs. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. For Tooltip Assistance. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. and select the wall. 19 On the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. select yellow. click No. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Structural Wall. 12 Under Colors. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select One hour. click Training Files. and click OK. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 In the Color dialog. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 15 Under Notifications. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. 14 Click the General tab. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.rvt. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. select None. the elements causing the error display using this color. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. select One hour. 16 Click OK. click the value for Selection Color. 24 When prompted to save. 20 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Options dialog. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click Modify. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.

Your login name displays by default. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Browse. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. under Default path for family template files. the family libraries. do not save the changes. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 2 In the Options dialog. click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select Red. Under Windows Username. clear Invert background color. 28 In the Options dialog. you can start a new project with that template. and click Open. click Browse. as well as the material and rendering libraries. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. you specify your default file locations. select the folder to save your files to by default. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Options dialog. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. and the family template files. These files are used primarily in the software support process. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. 4 Click Cancel. TIP To view a template. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Selection Color. Specifying File Locations | 109 . Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. click Browse. 5 Under Default path for user files. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Under Journal File Cleanup. Specifying File Locations on page 109. ■ ■ 30 Click OK. If prompted. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. and click Browse to select a template.

NOTE When you are opening. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. and you can create new libraries. However. You can modify the existing library names and path. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. click Place. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. or loading a Revit Structure file. 10 Under Libraries.This path is set automatically during the installation process. click (Add Value). such as in a large. and change the name to My Library. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. saving. In the following illustration. and notice the list of library names. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . centralized. and click on the right-side of the field. 8 Click Cancel. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane.

click My Library. 21 Under Libraries. or families. Specifying File Locations | 111 . Save. If you work in a large office. 14 Under Library Name. Load. templates. and select it as the library path. 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the My Library icon. select My Library.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. and click OK. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. 20 Click the File Locations tab. and click Open. 18 Click Cancel. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and Import dialogs. 16 Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. TIP You may want to create a new folder first.

17 Click OK. 19 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. click Restore Defaults. 21 Under Personal dictionary. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 5 In the text editor. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. If prompted. 9 In the text editor. do not save the changes. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click the Spelling tab. click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. 14 Click in the drawing area. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Modify. click template. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary.23 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Under Settings. 2 In the Options dialog. Click File menu ➤ Save. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 22 In the text editor. to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 23 In the Options dialog. click Edit. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click the Spelling tab. click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Text. 11 In the Options dialog. 20 Under Settings.

Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. For example. 6 Under Dimension Snaps. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rte. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. and enter 1.. work with snapping turned off. 8 In the Snaps dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'. click OK. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. In this exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. click Browse. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. As you zoom in and out within a view. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. you modify snap increments. you modify snap settings. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Structural Wall. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. under Template file. click Training Files. snapping reverts to the system default settings.25 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . 4 In the New Project dialog. 7 Under Object Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK.

zoom out until it does so. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. and click Wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. This is the increment that you added previously. While sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. 13 Click to set the wall endpoint. If you do not have a wheel button. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. click Modify. and move the cursor to the right. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. If it does not. and move the cursor to the right. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Do not set the wall end point. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.10 Click in the center of the drawing area. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries.

When a model component is loaded into a project. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. the midpoint. 2 Scroll down. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file.rvt. and specify the wall endpoint. Modifying Project Settings | 115 . and do not save the file. 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Finally. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.. Modifying Project Settings on page 115. and object styles. 20 Move the cursor downward. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. and select Concrete . you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. it will snap to the endpoints. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. fill patterns. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. annotations. Using these options. lines. and use it to complete the exercises. and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings. If you move the cursor along the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. You create and modify materials. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you apply a material to a component. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. save the project file with a unique name. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and the wall edges. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. and delete the value 1". 23 Click OK. 3 Click (Duplicate). 22 Under Dimension Snaps. 17 Enter SM. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. This list includes all materials available for use on model components. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Training Files.Precast Concrete for Name.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.

15 Select the left foundation wall. Fnd. and click OK. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. and click . and select the remaining exterior walls. click Edit/New. 6 Select the lower exterior wall. All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type. 12 On the right side of the Material field. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 16 Press CTRL. click Edit. select Concrete-Precast for Name. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall.O. enter Concrete . In the steps that follow. select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom. and double-click T. 14 Click OK 3 times. 18 On the Design Bar. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Duplicate.Custom for the new wall name. click Modify. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. . and click OK. click This is the material you created previously.Precast. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2. and click OK. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it. 17 In the Type Selector. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. 9 Enter Foundation . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. 10 In the Value field for Structure. Wall. 13 In the Materials dialog.

This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. In the following exercise. zoom into the model. Click Render. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. When it is finished. 21 In the drawing area. select Best. Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. Creating and Applying Materials | 117 . the material that you created is displayed. click . click Rendering dialog. 22 In the Rendering dialog. The rendering process begins. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail. 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. and select Rendering. you create a pattern and apply it to this material. and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render.19 On the View Toolbar.

rvt. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand Elevations. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Close the Rendering dialog. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 7 Under Custom. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Drafting pattern density is fixed.rvt. rotate. click Import. click Show Model. such as steel. 3 Under Pattern Type. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog.23 On the Rendering dialog. choose Model. You can align. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. under Display. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. click Custom. Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and double-click West. and move model patterns. 5 Click New. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. i_Settings-in progress.

TIP If the pattern does not display. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. and click Open. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. 22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. 15 On the Options Bar. click in the Material field for Layer 2. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. 10 Under Custom. 25 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the wall. and click OK. under Pattern Type. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. click Edit/New. Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. 17 In the Value field for Structure.TIP Typically. 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. click Modify. click OK. 24 Click OK 3 times. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 23 In the Materials dialog. to select a fill pattern.pat from the Common folder. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 . click Edit. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog. select Model. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. click . 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. 19 On the right side of the Materials field. 12 Click OK. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 26 On the View Toolbar. click 20 Under Surface Pattern. adjust your zoom settings as needed. . click . click .

28 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. i_Settings-in progress. Controlling Object Styles on page 120. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. For example. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. there are often multiple trusses within a project. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 2 On the keyboard. and double-click 3D.rvt. expand 3D Views. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

and click OK. double-click the Line Color field. under Custom Colors. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. and click Hidden Line. click Show categories from all disciplines. select Blue. Controlling Object Styles | 121 . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. click OK. 6 Under Category. expand Walls. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. 5 In the Object Styles dialog. click Model Graphics Style. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.3 On the View Control Bar. 7 Under the Walls category. 8 In the Color dialog.

Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. Under Line Pattern. 8 On the View Control Bar. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. select Truss. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Click OK. under Floor Plans.O. now you must apply it. expand Structural Framing. You have created a new line pattern. Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser. (example: plan view). you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. double-click T.rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. Wall. Fnd. enter Truss for Name. i_Settings-in progress. and select Web Joist. click New. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss. and click Hidden Line. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. click Model Graphics Style.

Select Blue for Line Color. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . 14 In the Select Line Style dialog. expand Structural Framing. 15 Click OK twice. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. and select Web Joist for Visibility. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Select Truss for Line Pattern. 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection.

and click OK. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. Enter 2' 0" for Offset. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. 23 In the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. equally spaced as shown below. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. click New. Slab. 26 Draw 3 vertical lines. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection.Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. click Lines. 18 In the Line Styles dialog. . Click OK. double-click T. select Underslab Drainage. 22 In the Type Selector.O. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. Click . 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name. 25 In the Options Bar. under Modify Subcategories. 24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. Select Red for Line Color. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click . specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click .

Modifying Annotations on page 125. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 29 On the Model Categories tab. and clear Underslab Drainage. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. click . 34 Click OK. 33 On the Model Categories tab. click the default value for Units Format. under Floor Plans.Imperial for name. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active. Modifying Annotations | 125 . expand Lines. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view. 5 Under Text.27 On the View Toolbar. You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. i_Settings-in progress. click Duplicate. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. and clear Underslab Drainage. 4 Enter Linear . This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. double-click Level 1. 30 Click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 In the Project Browser. expand Lines. and click OK. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

18 Click a beam. Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser. notice that there is a Linear . 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Floor Plans. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. Wall.rfa. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag. the other displays the instance value. 7 Click OK twice. click Modify. 15 Under Loaded Tags. You have created a new dimension style. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 On the Design Bar.6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag. click Tag All Not Tagged. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. 16 Click OK. In the Type Selector. . Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 22 On the View Toolbar. 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. The remaining untagged beams are tagged. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 12 Click Load. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Tags dialog. double-click T. 21 Under Leader. click Dimension. Structural Framing Tag. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Under Category. click Structural Framing Tag. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Imperial dimension available. click Training Files. verify that Create is clear. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. and click OK.O. Fnd.

under Length. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.rvt. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 3 In the Format dialog. select SF for Unit suffix. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. In this table. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 8 Under Walls. Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.unless there is an override. i_Settings-in progress. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. under Area. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. and click OK. In the final section. 6 Click OK.Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurement . In the second section. dimensions use these project settings. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. and Detail Level Options on page 127. and click OK. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. select Openings. and Detail Level Options | 127 . click .Temporary Dimensions. click the default value for Format. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. you modify the detail level assignments. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Specifying Units of Measurement.24 Proceed to the next exercise. You do not select a view scale to move it. In the first section. select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows. Unless there is an override. temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. Specifying Units of Measurement. dimension values display using this setting. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. and click OK. you modify the temporary dimension settings. 4 In the Project Units dialog. click the default value for Format. Temporary Dimensions. In this project. 12 Click OK. 5 In the Format dialog.

In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 2 In the Project Browser. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans. and double-click Completed Project. click Training Files.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . NOTE In this exercise. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Project_Browser.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Sheets (all).13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. In this exercise. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.rvt. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128.

On the Project Browser. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 10 In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. and click OK. and click OK. and click Apply.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. select Discipline. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. expand each sheet set. In the Project Browser. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. and click New. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . and click OK. under Sheets. expand each view type. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 5 On the Views tab. 8 Select Phase. click the Folders tab. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. under Views. notice that views are grouped based on phase. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. and click OK. 16 Click the Views tab.

expand Views ➤ Elevations. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. and double-click Building Elevation. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. named print settings. 2 Under Template File. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. If your work requires a variety of templates. In this lesson. and click OK. Whenever you create a new project or template. Other than the default template. enter a unique file name. and rendered scenes in a template. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. dimensions styles. and Discipline. when you create a new project. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. such as structural or construction. you create an office template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. 5 Click OK. If you want to save this file. you select the starting point for your structural template. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. You can also save these settings in a template file. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. navigate to your preferred directory.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. In the lesson that follows. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . preloaded families. Depending on your needs. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and view names. When you create a new template based on an existing template. click Browse. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. levels. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. the same rules apply. For example. select Project for Create new. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. Type. When you create new projects. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry.rte template. You can save Project Browser organization schemes.

TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. 13 Click Open. Other templates. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. drag a zoom region around the level heads. close them. 8 In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . in the drawing area. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. click Browse. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 12 Select a default template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. such as the structural template. When you create the material. For example. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. select Project Template. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. and click OK. If you want to use a template other than the default. If you have additional projects open. you can select it now. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. weights.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. In this exercise. 14 Under Create New. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. you modify the project settings for your new template. 11 Under Template File. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools.

Observe the materials that are already defined. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. one for perspective model line styles. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. In the dialog. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab. create new subcategories. see the previous lesson. You can align. and one for annotation symbol line styles. 14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. For more details on modifying these settings. rotate. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. In the Object Styles dialog. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category.During this exercise. you can set line weights. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. line patterns. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. Modifying System Settings on page 107. 2 Scroll down the Name list. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. You can add and delete view scales. 13 Modify categories. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. line colors. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. and create new subcategories as needed. create and modify them as needed. and move model patterns. 11 If necessary. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. 9 Click the Model Objects tab. 7 Click OK when finished. specific modifications are not dictated. or refer to the Help documentation. or modify existing patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. such as beams and columns in orthographic views. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed.

43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. modify the line weight. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. select it from this list. and specify the properties. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . line color. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed. and specify the properties. angular. and click Edit. 31 If necessary. such as section lines and dimension lines. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and dimensions. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. 35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. and radial dimensions are modified separately. name the style.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. click Duplicate. 32 Click OK. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. Linear. To see the details of a particular style. select it. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. name the style. 23 Click OK. select it from this list. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. click Duplicate. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 38 Click OK. 28 Click OK. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. To see the details of a particular style. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 30 For existing line categories. 41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. tags. or line pattern as needed. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 26 To modify a line pattern.

and Angle settings. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. TIP In the drawing area. 53 Click OK. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 51 Under Length. 48 To load new annotation tags. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary. and click OK. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. click Load. or Fine. and move view scales as needed. Volume. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. In the Tags dialog. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. The detail level is based on view scale. 56 Click OK. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. Medium. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. For example. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 59 Under Doors and Windows. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 60 Click OK. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. and choose a decimal symbol. Using the arrows between the columns. 62 Review the table. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected. Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. click Format. Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.44 Click OK. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 58 Under Walls. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 55 Specify the Slope option. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. When you create a new view. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular.

In a typical project. click the Views tab. engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. 68 Click the Sheets tab. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. and select Properties. or from the roof looking down (down direction). For example. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser. 67 If necessary.NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. To move the view scales. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. 66 Delete. Rename. 69 Delete. create new browser organization types. 70 If necessary. 71 Click OK. create new browser organization types. 63 Click OK. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). 65 In the Browser Organization dialog. click View Direction. In certain projects. Rename. click the arrows between columns. or Edit existing organization types. Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. or Edit existing organization types. click Edit/New. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome.

However. Each command is available on the Settings menu. For example. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and make modifications in each area as necessary. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If necessary. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. and framing tags. Use the table below as a checklist. 76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. You can find additional information in Help. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Although these settings can be saved within a template. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. In such a case. Links to associated tutorials are provided. This could be useful for things such as title blocks. there are several additional commands that control the project environment.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144.

See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. click on the Options Bar. select it. If necessary. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. if you loaded every beam type you could find. notice the list of beams is already loaded. or load a new beam type. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Depending on the intended use of this template. titleblocks. click Beam. and click OK. and beams. Although the options are endless. However. Make modifications. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. 3 To modify. For example. You can load any family or group into a template. select Edit/New. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. create.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. brace symbols. you do both. you could load detail components. In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. For example. and column symbols. or add to this selection. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify type properties. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. In addition. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. there are some important thoughts to consider. In the steps that follow. enter a name. you may want to delete. Click Duplicate. Although this is possible. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. If you have not completed the previous exercise. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. do so before starting this exercise. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. and click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. select Edit/New. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. and click Open. select Load. modify. you can move onto the next component type. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. If this selection is satisfactory. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. Obviously. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

or modify any component families or groups as necessary. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. To do so. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Press ESC twice to return to the template. click Preview. click Load. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. Notice that each family category is listed. load. and click Delete.) 9 Expand the titleblock.4 Click OK. 11 To load a titleblock. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. 12 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. expand Families. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. create. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. This titleblock is currently part of the template. and select the titleblock type. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. right-click the component. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols.

TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. In this exercise. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. and select Apply View Template. 2 For Name. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. select Structural Framing Plan. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. you will first modify view templates. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. Discipline. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. you can apply a view template to any view. View Range. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. and double-click Level 1. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. In this exercise. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans. In addition. 3 Specify each value as needed. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and make modifications. 4 If necessary. right-click. you create the views required for your template. rename or duplicate the view template. At any time. Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . select the view. Detail Level. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. you save time and increase consistency. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. 6 Click OK. you created new projects using different templates. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs.

10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. If necessary. 15 If you modified any other view templates. 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. if desired. duplicate. To do so. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. open the view from the Project Browser. After the template is applied. right-click {3D}. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. right-click Level 1. or delete this view. on the View toolbar. and click OK. TIP To apply the template to multiple views. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or delete them as needed. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. under Structural Plans. expand 3D Views. 19 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. review the existing floor plans. and select Rename. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. and apply the appropriate template. Rename. 27 In the Project Browser. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. click Apply. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. You can also duplicate or delete the view. click 26 In the Project Browser. double-click Building Elevation. the view is not linked to the template in any way. review the Structural plans and elevations. under Structural Plans. Black levels have no associated views. 20 To add additional levels to the template. Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. select the view in the Project Browser.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. You can rename this view. under 3D Views. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. duplicate. 24 Create additional levels as needed. 18 In the Project Browser. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 In the Options Bar. under Elevations. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. select Make Plan View. 28 Rename the 3D View. 11 Click Apply. 12 In the Project Browser. This option means that every time a new plan view is created.

Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the View toolbar. On the Filter tab. click Schedule/Quantities. This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views. The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area. Using this dialog. click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click . On the Sorting/Grouping tab.29 To create additional 3D views. select and order required fields. You may want to add schedules to a template. and modify their properties accordingly. Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 . you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance. click . 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options. modify settings. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. select the category type. Save the view 32 To save the view. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. assign filters. supply a view name. and click OK. 34 If you want to add schedules to your template.

right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. select the default titleblock. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can still add views to the sheet. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template. 36 Click OK. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. beams. select the titleblock and delete it. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. click Sheet. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. and click OK. On the Appearance tab. To do so. After the sheet is created. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. double-click the sheet number. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. or on the sheet itself. click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. and click Rename. and columns. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and click OK. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. You are prompted to select a titleblock. modify settings. select one. and modify their properties accordingly. modify settings. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. 41 Create new sheets as needed.

Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143. and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. When you import a DWG or DXF file. ■ 5 Click OK. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint.3 Under General. Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 .txt).) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN.

Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. they become the set mappings for the project. and click Save. and so on. they cannot be used to tag objects. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. project parameters.2 For each category. Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. doors. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. click Save As. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. for example. 5 For each category.txt) for MicroStation. These settings are retained within the project template. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. and unlike shared parameters. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. name the file. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . When scheduling. therefore. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. click Save As. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. 8 In the dialog. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and click Save. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. When you save these mappings to a text file. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. When you create a multi-category schedule. For example. name the file. and so on. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 . 9 Click Save As. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. windows. They cannot be shared with other projects. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and click Save. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. Using shared parameters. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight.16).

11 For each parameter group. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. click Add. 5 Enter the group name. under Groups. and select Shared Parameter. 27 Click OK. 2 Click Create. After the file is named. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. This allows you to name the external parameter file. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 17 Under Discipline. and specify the Type. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office.In this exercise. Creating Named Print Settings. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. If a file already exists. 10 Click OK. enter a parameter name. select a group to which you want to add parameters. 9 Name the parameter. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. and click OK. select a parameter value type. you may want to save the file to a network location. select Project parameter. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 8 Under Parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 . 3 Name and save the file. and select a shared parameter. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 21 Click OK. 23 To add a shared project parameter. 7 Under Parameter group. select a parameter discipline type. click New. 25 Click OK. 24 Click Select. add required parameters. you can begin creating parameter groups. click New. 18 Under Type. and click OK when finished. 22 Add project parameters as needed. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 16 Under Name. 14 Click Add. For each parameter group. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. you can create a list of parameters. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson.

37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. By creating named settings within the template. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. The tag is now part of the template. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. you need only select a setting. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 34 Under Name. For each printer. enter a name for the schedule. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. you can set options such as sheet sizes. you create named print settings. and add them to your default template file. make minor modifications if necessary. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. click OK. and click Open. 36 When you have completed the schedule. and the percent of actual size.For information on creating multi-category tags. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. and print. 2 Under Name. and click OK. you can load them into the template. click Schedule/Quantities. or consult the Help documentation. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. paper placement. Creating Named Print Settings on page 146. select the tag. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

3 Under Settings. and create additional settings as needed. click Setup. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click New. 6 Modify the printer settings. 5 In the New dialog. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 4 Click Save As. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 .

click Setup. If you need to share this file with others. and saved them to a template. 11 Click OK when finished. 18 Select the template. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. In addition. 17 Select Browse. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Click the File Locations tab. select Template Files (*. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 15 Name the template. 24 Click OK. Your template is complete.9 In the Print dialog. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. select a different printer. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In this lesson.rte). The only remaining task is to save it. click Browse. and click Open. You can also set this template as your default template. Use the template 16 To use the template. and click Open. loaded components. 23 Navigate to the template location. and create new settings for this printer. you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 19 Click OK. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select it. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 22 Next to Default template file. you should save it to a network path. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. and click Save. By investing the time to individualize your template. 14 Under Save as type. you modified settings. and save it as a template file.

NOTE For training purposes. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. and Revit Architecture. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. Notice that Level 2 is bold. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 149 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson. Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. click Training Files. AutoCAD Architecture.Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns.dwg. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans.

6 On the Options toolbar. ■ ■ ■ For Colors. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. Exterior facade outlines. copy.Center to Center. you cannot select individual elements in the linked model.NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. Click Open. paste. 5 In the drawing area. drag. However. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . and rotate the view as one object. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view. select Auto . select Black and White. click drawing area. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. stairs and elevator opening symbols. click the imported/linked file. For Positioning.

Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. In the Xref Manager dialog. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. select Export to AutoCAD. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. a new training file is supplied. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. expand Views (all). This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close.dwg. In the next tutorial. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type.rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. click Training Files. and expand Structural Plans. select the Imported Categories tab. the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1. and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT. In the next tutorial.7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the File menu. 9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2. and select the latest available format. you use these columns to complete the structural framing.dwg. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Notice that Level 2 is bold. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . NOTE For training purposes. You can save the open file if you wish. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Click Open. click Revit Structure drawing area. stairs. 5 In the drawing area. click the Imported Categories tab. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 On the Options toolbar. For Positioning.Origin to Origin. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. Exterior facade outlines. and elevator opening symbols. click the imported/linked file. select Invert. select Auto .

click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Constraints. 11 In the drawing area. and click OK. and on the Option Bar. 10 On the View toolbar. click the linked file. Click OK. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. enter -1' 0' for Base Offset. do the following: ■ ■ .dwg. click Partial Explode. 13 Select any column. click . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 . 12 On the Options toolbar.9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT.

a new training file is supplied. In the next tutorial. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .Notice the column adjusts to the change. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area.rvt. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background.Origin to Origin. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. columns. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise. 6 Click Open. Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers. select Auto . and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements. You can save the open file if desired. select a template file. 5 In the Add Link dialog. for Positioning. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. walls. You can copy grids. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click OK. levels. Notice that Level 2 is bold. 2 In the New Project dialog. and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit. select Project under Create New. click Training Files.

click Revit Structure drawing area. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 8 In the drawing area. 9 On the Options toolbar. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. 7 Enter ZF. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar.Exterior facade outlines. 11 Click the imported Revit drawing. click Options. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 . click the linked file. stairs and elevator opening symbols.

columns need to be split at each level. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. Also. To select more than one grid. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. select Split Columns by Levels. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. under Structural Plans. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . select Level 2. Columns. Walls. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. click Copy. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Columns dialog. Grids. under Additional Copy Parameters. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. and while pressing CTRL. and Floors). make selections. When finished. Therefore.The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog. click the Columns tab. 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated.

NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Copy. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. double-click Building Elevation. After you select the grid. click OK. click OK. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. To select more than one level. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. The warning can be ignored. press CTRL. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and that the type from the new project will be used. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser. and select each level. 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. and that the type from the new project will be used.

NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. The warning can be ignored. 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . click OK. The warning can be ignored. floors. click Finish Mode. click Copy. and that the type from the new project will be used. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. To select more than one element. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. press CTRL. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. 25 On the Design bar. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and select each element. After selecting each element. Copy structural walls. and on the Options Bar. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. click .After you select each level. select Level 1. and columns 22 In the Project Browser. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. under Structural Plans. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed.

and floors. 32 In the Manage Links dialog. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Links will appear in the file they are linked into. click the Revit tab. the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. check the value for Structural. The linked Revit file is displayed. click . Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. Click OK. and on the Option Bar. NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. columns. 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file.27 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file. ■ Select Overlay. click Reference Type. and click OK. select Bearing for Structural Usage. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 .

33 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new training file is supplied. In the next tutorial. You can save the open file if you wish. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial. NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes. In a later tutorial. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. 160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Project Coordination on page 461. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred.

161 .Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter. You also learn how to splice the columns. After you copy columns. and then copy this framing to other levels. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. Creating a Structural Model In this lesson. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels. you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2.

162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 1 On the View toolbar. 5 Click the value in the grid head. and enter A. click . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. the imported drawing is a halftone.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids. 4 Select the left vertical grid line. . click Grid. click structural model. which you use as a background drawing for placing columns.Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click structural model. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . 8 When you get to grid I. 9 On the View toolbar. .As you select subsequent grid lines. The last vertical grid is K. change the value to J. 6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence. 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. Notice it is labeled B. Zoom in and out as needed. Notice it is grid L. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line.

and enter 1 for the new value. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. click Grid. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 Click the column to select the arc start point. 17 On the Design Bar.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. click . Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric. 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1. The bottom grid should be grid 5. click . Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 18 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the atrium.

Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 .20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint. 21 Click the column to set the arc radius.

Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown. 24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown.22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the grid. 166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection. To save changes. Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns. Adding Structural Columns | 167 .rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise.25 Click File menu ➤ Close.

click Finish. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. right-click in the Design Bar.Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33. 6 On the Options Bar. click . NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. and click Modelling. 4 In the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display.

11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Under Constraints. K1 G2. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. Notice the new level is named Level 3. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. 15 On the left side of the elevation. which are outside of the structure footprint. B5. and press DELETE. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset. 8 Select the columns listed below. Click OK. and click Select All Instances. click Level. K4 A5. click ■ ■ ■ . you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. 10 On the Options Bar. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. K2 G5. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. In addition. 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. J1. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). NOTE If necessary. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. click Modify. click Modify. Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. and double-click South Elevation. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0".7 Press ESC. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2. H1. K5 K3. J2. 12 On the Design Bar. H5. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. 17 On the Design Bar. J5. H2. Adding Structural Columns | 169 .

TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections.20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Modify. To save changes. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. 29 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . or close the exercise file without saving changes. double-click South Elevation. and click OK. 170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 28 On the Design Bar. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. click Check None. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. select Level 3 and Level 4. under Structural Plans. Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Structural Columns. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click Level 2. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. 24 In the Filter dialog. 27 In the Select Levels dialog.

8 On the Design Bar. Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 3 In the Type Selector. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. 7 On the Options Bar. Specify Girder for Usage. click Beam. double-click Level 2. click Training Files. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . under Structural Plans.Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise. click Finish. 6 Select grid lines H and J. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. click .rvt. Click Grid. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Beam. click ■ ■ ■ . for z-Direction Offset Value. and click Select All Instances. select Other. 19 In the Select Levels dialog. 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. framing the bays with girders. 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify.9 On grids H and J. enter -0' 7". delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5. 20 Click OK. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select a column center. select Level 3 and Level 4. NOTE In the following image. and double-click East Section . and draw a girder from column to column. Under Constraints. 13 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes.Perspective. Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. for z-Direction Justification. Specify Girder for Usage. Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3. 16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. 21 In the Project Browser.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. under Structural Plans. select Center. For Beam Type. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams.rvt. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click Level 2. click Beam System. Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. you add beam systems to Level 2. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4.NOTE If necessary. enter 6' 0". click Sketch. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. click File menu ➤ Save As. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Beam Systems | 173 . Under Pattern. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Structural Beam System Properties. Adding Beam Systems on page 173. click Training Files. For Spacing. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. To save changes. For Justification. 7 Click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System.

click Beam Direction. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Pick Supports. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay.8 On the Design Bar. In the next step you edit the beam direction. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the girder between H3 and J3.

click Finish Sketch. the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes. Adding Beam Systems | 175 .12 On the Design Bar. NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images.

select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. specify 2. 15 On the Design Bar. For Beam Type. 14 When specifying the beam direction. click Finish Sketch. 176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . For Number of Lines. Under Pattern. select the girder between J2 and J3.13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.

For Number of Lines. double-click Level 2. 19 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay. 21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. Adding Beam Systems | 177 . For Beam Type. Under Pattern. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 22 Click to place the beam system. 20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Beam System. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. specify 3. Click OK.

25 On the Design Bar. 178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system. and press TAB until the beam system highlights. You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above.24 Click to place the beam system. click Modify.

Adding a Composite Deck on page 180. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Notice the copied beam systems. Adding Beam Systems | 179 .Perspective. 32 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select Level 3 and Level 4.Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. double-click East Sections . or close the exercise file without saving changes. 31 Click OK. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Select All Instances. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file.

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. you add a composite deck to Level 2. double-click Level 2. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 3 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. Under Constraints. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type.Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise. 7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. and then sketch along the girders. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. click Floor Properties.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. 8 On the Design Bar. click Slab. Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser.

14 In the Project Browser. Adding a Composite Deck | 181 . and click OK.Perspective. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 12 In the dialog. Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab. under 3D Views. select Level 3 and Level 4. 13 On the Design Bar. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. 15 Click File menu ➤ Close.Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click East Section . click Modify.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). and when it highlights. you add vertical bracing to a bay. 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. double-click Elevation 1-a. Adding Bracing In this exercise. click Framing Elevation. 6 In the Type Selector. select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2. Adding Bracing on page 182. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point.rvt.To save changes. Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. click Brace. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. under Structural Plans. The next exercise uses a new training file. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint). Use the Status Bar to see the snap point. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 4 In the Project Browser.

you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J. NOTE If necessary. 9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4. 8 Use the same method for the opposite brace.■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). Adding Bracing | 183 . and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint.

2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under 3D Views. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser.Perspective. To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.10 In the Project Browser. 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click Level 2.rvt. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. under Structural Plans. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding Shear Walls on page 184. double-click East Section . click Training Files.

For Depth.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain. click Structural Wall. specify Ground Level.10" Concrete. 6 Sketch 4 walls. TIP After sketching the walls. Adding Shear Walls | 185 . tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 4 In the Type Selector. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location.

2 On the View toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. or close the exercise file without saving changes. TIP During selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . click . and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. double-click Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. under Constraints. 8 Select all 4 walls. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. To save changes. click . 9 On the Options Bar.7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . you add isolated foundations to column locations.

Under Analytical Model. under Structural Plans. Under Analytical Model. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. double-click Ground Level. 8 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 . select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". In your training file. Click OK. the footing is placed at Ground Level. select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. By default. 10 In the Type Selector.5 In the Filter dialog. enter 0' 0" for Base Offset. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location. Select Structural Columns. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 11 In the drawing area. NOTE In the following image. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. . the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click File menu ➤ Save As. adding horizontal framing. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons. click Beam. Click Grid. The next exercise uses a new training file. you complete the structural model. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. 3 In the Type Selector. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. foundation. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model. double-click Level 2. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name.Perspective. under Structural Plans. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise. Completing the Structural Model on page 188. Specify Girder for Usage. In the exercises that follow.13 In the Project Browser. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. bracing. openings. double-click East Section . under 3D Views. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and concrete wall framing.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

6 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw a pick box around all the grids. using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. Add beam chains to the following locations.NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. 7 On the Design Bar. click model. TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises. . complete the framing of this bay. 10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. click Modify. click Finish. Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . ■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda.

■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5. 190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . ■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5.■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls.

13 Right-click. and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. enter -0' 7". and click Select All Instances. Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. click of the model. . for z-Direction Justification. For Number of Lines. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select Other. 20 Click to place the beam system. enter 3. 14 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ .Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar. Under Pattern. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. click Beam System. 17 On the Options Bar. Under Constraints. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. Click OK. select the top girder. for z-Direction Offset Value. 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.

22 On the Options Bar. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . For Number of Lines. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. Under Pattern. trace the outline of the bay. click Beam System. click Sketch. Click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 3. 26 On the Sketch Design Bar. 25 Using the sketch tool. click Finish Sketch. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter -0' 7" for Elevation.

If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 . ignore it.27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2. Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Lastly. under Structural Plans. In addition. click Training Files. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes.rvt. the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. . The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. In this new training file. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. click model. 2 On the View toolbar. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. beam systems have been added to all bays. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 2. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194.

for z-Direction Justification.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. select Other. for z-Direction Offset Value. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Beam. enter -0' 7". Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . Under Constraints. 7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point.

Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Beam. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. To save changes. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. or close the exercise file without saving changes.8 Using the same method. 10 In the Type Selector. Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. and arced. you can use a combination of lines including. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. In this training file. Garage Level-1.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In addition. click Training Files. 3 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Slab. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. click Floor Properties. picked. under Structural Plans. straight. When sketching this deck. enter -0' 2". additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. sketched.rvt. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. Roof. 6. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . double-click Level 2. For Height Offset from Level. and Foundation. Click OK. the following new levels were added: 5. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser. 7.

click File menu ➤ Save As.TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges). 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Chain on the Options Bar. The next exercise uses a new training file. and sketch a chain of continuous line segments. 7 Click Finish Sketch. 8 On the View toolbar. click . 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. click Modify. 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. click (Join Geometry). click Modify. and on the Design Bar. 62 On the View toolbar. 60 Enter ZF. Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. 65 Select the tapered roof. click . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 .59 On the Design Bar. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise. click Training Files.Atrium.rvt. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 2 On the View toolbar. click File menu ➤ Save As. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name.66 In the Project Browser. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes. you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium. double-click Level 5. under Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing. click . double-click 3D . under 3D Views. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. using the slab shape edit tools. 216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

4 On the Options Bar. and is available for modification. click (Modify Sub-Elements). Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar.3 Select the atrium curved slab. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 . Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar. The edge of the curved slab highlights. 6 Click the center point of the slab arc. click (Draw Split Lines).

218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click (Add New Points).7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab. 9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line. Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar.

14 Select the split lines. click . Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 . 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the curved slab. click Modify. Notice that the shape edit points display.Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab. and press DELETE.

Atrium. 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and enter -0’ 6”. The general shape of the curved slab displays.Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension. 17 On the View toolbar. Notice that the edges of the curved slab display. double-click 3D . click . and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof.

click section view. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . click . for Curved Edge Condition. double-click Level 5. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point. double-click Section 3. 22 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. and click OK. under Slab Shape Edit. under Structural Plans. 21 Select the slab. 19 On the View toolbar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. . double-click 3D .Atrium. click Project to side. click Conform to Curve. click OK.

29 Click the center drainage point. enter SX (Snap to Point). click 28 On the Options Bar. and select the left endpoint of the curved slab. 222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 30 Click the center drainage point. click . enter SX. and select the right endpoint of the curved slab.27 On the Options Bar. .

click Modify. 34 Select the atrium curved slab. click . double-click Level 5. double-click 3D . 32 In the Project Browser. 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser.31 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 . under Structural Plans. under 3D Views.Atrium.

38 On the View toolbar. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Sections (Building Sections). and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. double-click 3D . 40 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes.View. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the slab. Adding Miter Joins on page 224. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection.rvt. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save As. View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 3. under 3D Views. click section view. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . . Adding Miter Joins In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame. click (Edit Beam Joins). 4 On the View toolbar. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Adding Miter Joins | 225 . The slab is now hidden. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit. 6 On the Options Bar.3 On the View Control Bar. Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame. You can now use the Beam Join Editor. click .

8 Click the arrow control on the second beam. 226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .7 Click the arrow control on the first beam.

Adding Miter Joins | 227 . 9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join. The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View).The miter join is complete.

11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line. select Detail Level: Fine. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 On the View Control Bar.View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined. select Detail Level: Coarse. Notice the miter lock remains locked.

Adding Curved Beams | 229 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. you add a curved beam to the atrium. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Modify. double-click Level 4. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. The next exercise uses a new training file. click File menu ➤ Save As. under Structural Plans. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 On the View toolbar.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.Notice the miter lock remains locked. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Curved Beams on page 229. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. Adding Curved Beams In this exercise.

5 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint.Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point. click Beam. 4 In the Type Selector. select Chain. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. and click .

Adding Curved Beams | 231 .8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

select the remaining curved beams. 10 Using the same method. 9 Press ESC twice. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 13 On the Options Bar. click . 12 While pressing CTRL. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns. Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams.The beam is placed.

Scroll down to Analytical Model.Atrium. and on the View Control Bar. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. 19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. for Layout Rule. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 Select the bottom beam. and for Vertical Projection. enter 0' 0". View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. select Top of Beam. Click OK. enter 6' 0". select Top. double-click Level 4. For Beam Type. For Elevation. click Beam System. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select 3D. Adding Curved Beams | 233 . Under Pattern. under Structural Plans. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. select Maximum Spacing. 16 Select the floor. Click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. under Structural Plans. double-click 3D . For Maximum Spacing. enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification.

23 Using the same method. 234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .The beam system is placed. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium.

Adding Curved Beams | 235 . 25 Select the beam. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Select Use hard-points. and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. and on the View Control Bar. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. NOTE When hard-points are enabled. For Maximum discretized offset. Click OK. 27 In the Project Browser. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter. double-click 3D . click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model.Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar.Atrium. enter 0' 4". select Approximate Curve. under Structural Plans. 28 Select the floor. click . .

and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. 2 On the View toolbar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding an Opening In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings. you then copy the opening to each level.29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. and draw a zoom box around the stairway. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. To save changes. Adding an Opening on page 236. double-click Ground Level. under Structural Plans.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. click . The next exercise uses a new training file.

click Modify. Adding an Opening | 237 . click Door. 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown. 6 Select the door opening. 5 On the Design Bar.3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.

select Level 7. select 3D View. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. 11 Click OK. under 3D Views. and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 In the Project Browser. click stairway. select Level 2. 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 9 In the Select Levels dialog. 14 On the View toolbar.. 10 While pressing SHIFT. .

2 On the View toolbar.15 Click File menu ➤ Close. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D View. Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239. click . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To save changes. click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. expand 3D Views. Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening. Finally. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 .rvt. under Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you import the revised beam back into the project. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files.

240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 9 Using the sketch tool. Make sure the opening forms a closed loop. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Component. click Modify. select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketch tools. 8 In the Type Selector. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening.

click Training Files. and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor. Click OK. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241. The next exercise uses a new training file. Finally. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions.Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . or close the exercise file without saving changes. click ■ ■ . Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you load the new family into the project. under Structural Plans. 15 Continue with the next exercise. expand 3D Views. click . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then modify the beam by adding an opening. 12 On the Options Bar. and double-click 3D View. for d. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 0' 2".rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor. 2 On the View toolbar. select both stiffener plates. To save changes.

click Modify. Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar. click Edit Family. The beam is displayed in a new window. under Specify a New Work Plane.3 Select the beam. and draw a circle approximately as shown. Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser. 12 Click the centerline of the beam. click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. and double-click Front. 7 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar. click . click located to the left of Offset. 242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam. click Name. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 14 On the Family Design Bar. 13 Press ESC. and click (Circle). and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). 9 In the Work Plane dialog. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. 5 In the Revit dialog. 8 On the Family Design Bar.

18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. 20 Press ESC. click . click (Align). and select the centerline of the circle.15 Select the circle. select the Center Mark Visible parameter. click Finish Sketch. 23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. 17 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. click The centerline of the circle is now visible. NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. and the select the centerline of the circle. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. click (Align). Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . 25 On the View toolbar. regardless of the length. 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. . and click OK. 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane.

and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam.rfa. 30 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow. 27 On the View Control toolbar. and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening. select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .26 Select the circle on the beam. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

The project file reopens. 32 In the Load into Projects dialog. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors. 34 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 33 Enter ZF. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. 36 While pressing CTRL. click .Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 38 Click in the drawing area. click Load into Projects. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 . Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector. select the beams for Levels 2 through 4.rvt located in the Imperial project file.rfa. 35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40.

40 Continue with the next exercise. Adding Foundation Walls on page 246. In this new training file. and walls are generated downward to the foundation. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. You add these walls using the Ground Level view.rvt. 246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .The modified beams with openings display. In addition. The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise. you add structural walls. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

4 On the Options Bar. The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. double-click Ground Level. 6 On the Options Bar. select Wall Centerline. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ .Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . select Basic Wall: Foundation . click Structural Wall. for Location Line. For Base Constraint. select Foundation. click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file. enter -0' 6". For Top Offset. under Structural Plans. .12" Concrete. 3 In the Type Selector.

you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. click . On portions of the south wall. 12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible. double-click 3D View. and select Chain. 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. under 3D Views. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline.

double-click 3D View. 4 In the Options Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. press TAB. In addition. 7 In the Project Browser. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. double-click Ground Level. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar.To save changes. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 . If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and select the foundation wall chain. 3 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. The next exercise uses a new training file. 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process.rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. select Foundation for Depth. under Structural Plans. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise. click Training Files. under 3D Views. and click Hide Element. click File menu ➤ Save As. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. such as the atrium. click Modify. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter.

11 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The foundation wall is displayed. click Floor Properties. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise. under Structural Plans. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. click Slab. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. sloped slabs. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and concrete beam framing. Click OK. click Pick Walls. To save changes.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. enter 0. 3 On the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. select 6" Concrete. For Height Offset From Level. click Training Files. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. double-click Ground Level. 10 On the View Control Bar. The next exercise uses a new training file.

TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible. WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. under 3D Views. 7 Click Finish Sketch. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face. click Delete Type. double-click 3D View. NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 .6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. click Yes. If necessary.

under Structural Plans. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. click Finish. It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. and another between G4 and G5. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select the line. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT. 18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2. click Beam. 16 On the Options Bar. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. expand the warning and select the framing element. 12 In the Type Selector. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution.Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. click Grid. 13 On the Options Bar. It will display as selected in the drawing area. double-click Ground Level. 14 Select all grid lines.

Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. 27 In the Project Browser. Joist. Other) and Floors. click . 22 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. 23 In the Filter dialog. select Structural Framing (Girder. NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. double-click 3D View. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. select Garage Level -1. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . click Modify. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible. click Check None. and then click OK.

37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. click Lines. and click Hidden Line. 41 In the Project Browser. click the Model Graphics Style control. 31 On the View Control Bar. click Slab. 42 On the View Control Bar. select Garage Level-1. click Slope Arrow. For Height Offset at Tail. For Level at Head. enter 0. 38 Right-click the slope arrow. 34 On the Design Bar. double-click Garage Level -1. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure. enter 0' 6". Click OK. 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. and select Element Properties. 36 On the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. and click Hidden Line. click Finish Sketch. 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 40 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. For Height Offset at Head. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click South Elevation. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model.

select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. and draw a zoom box around the ramp. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type. click Beam System. enter 5. Under Pattern. Click OK. under 3D Views. 55 Draw an outline of the ramp.Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . select Ground Level. 48 In the Work Plane dialog. . click Lines. double-click 3D View. 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. For Value. 52 In the Project Browser. click 54 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the ramp. 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp. under Structural Views. click Set Work Plane. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. 47 On the Design Bar. select Structural Beam System Properties. under Number of Lines. 45 On the View toolbar. select Pick a plane. 53 On the View toolbar. click .

Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar. double-click 3D View. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. there are no drawing tools to select. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp. 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . When you are adding a wall opening. and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp.56 On the Design Bar. click . 60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. and zoom in on the ramp. 62 Sketch the opening. 57 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 58 On the View toolbar. You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. click . corner to corner.

you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Unjoin Elements. Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next exercise uses a new training file. Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 . 66 Proceed to the final exercise. 64 Select the garage opening. click File menu ➤ Save As. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. To save changes. 63 On the Design Bar. and continue with the next step. Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257. In addition. click Modify. or close the exercise file without saving changes. In this case. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model.

For Foundation Thickness.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. clear Structural Framing. click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Edit/New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. Under Dimensions. enter 1' 6". click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. A continuous foundation is added. For Heel length. and click OK. and click to select the foundation wall chain. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. enter 1' 6". 2 Enter ZF.rvt. for Toe length. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. double-click Foundation. enter 1' 6". 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu. Click OK twice. 13 In the Type Selector. under Structural Plans. under Visibility. 7 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click Foundation ➤ Wall. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation. 5 On the Design Bar. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser.

In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. double-click 3D View.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 In the Project Browser. Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . Precast Concrete on page 261. You can save the open file if you wish. 18 Proceed to the next tutorial. under 3D Views.

260 .

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Beam System. In the first lesson. 261 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete. under Structural Plans.rvt. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. double-click Roof.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial. click Training Files. you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure.

do the following: For Layout Rule. For Clear Spacing. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. select Center. under 3D Views. 6 Click to place the beam system. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. enter 0' 1". 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. select Clear Spacing. For Justification. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. The beam system is displayed. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Beam Type.3 On the Options Bar. 262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . under Pattern.

Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. . i_RST_Precast-in progress. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress. Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam. 1 On the View Toolbar.rvt. click shown.rvt. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 .

under Construction. double-click Roof. under Sections (Building Section). i_RST_Precast-in progress. click . 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Select All Instances. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264. 4 On the Options Bar.3 Right-click the selected beam. Notice the spacing between each precast beam. and click OK. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 2 In the Project Browser. for Start and End Extension. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise. you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam. enter 0' 5". 3 Select the beam system. double-click Section 1.

Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 . click . 8 Proceed to the next lesson. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 6 In the Project Browser. enter 0' 0". You then import the revised beam back into the project. Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed.4 On the Options Bar. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. under Sections (Building Section). double-click Section 1. under Construction. for Clear Spacing.

3 In the Revit dialog.Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_RST_Precast-in progress. click Edit Family. The beam is displayed in a new window. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 4 In the Family Project Browser. and double-click Left. 266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing. 2 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the beam.rvt. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown.

click the Annotations Categories tab.Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. ■ ■ Under Visibility. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile. 8 In the Revit dialog. click . The reference planes and dimensions are now visible. 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and then click OK. and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo. Click Apply. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. and click Edit.

click Ref Plane. 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. and click Modify. 16 Press ESC. under Options. click Ref Plane. select Not a Reference. and click OK. 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown.Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar. 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 18 On the Options Bar. click . Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. for Is Reference.

and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. under Options. 27 On the Options Bar. select Not a Reference. click . 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". 26 While pressing CTRL. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . select both vertical reference planes. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. for Is Reference. 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. and click OK. 24 Press ESC.22 Press ESC. Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. click . 32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. 34 Press ESC.31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown.

38 For the align-to point. and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown. Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. select the vertical reference plane as shown. Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown.36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. 37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align). 39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown. 42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. 41 Press ESC.

click Lines. 46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane. 45 On the Design bar. Snap to the end of the top horizontal line. 47 Press ESC. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam.44 Press DELETE. Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.

Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). click . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 . 50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown. 51 On the View Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam.

and then click OK. Align the bottom horizontal surface. click Load into Projects. enter 6' 0". Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar. If it does not. The beam should adapt to all changes. Add dimensions to each reference plane. For Width. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. enter 10' 0". 54 In the Family Types dialog. and click Yes. 274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 57 In the Reload Family dialog. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Family Types. Click Apply. 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial.52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes. Sketch the new profile. Flex the design 53 On the Design bar. Creating Drawings on page 275. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. fix any problems with alignment or constraints.

The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. and section views. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. and are accessible from the Project Browser. which are a type of view in a project. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. and three-dimensional (3D) views.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. usually contain a title block. and how to create new views from a model. how to add views to the sheets. Sheets are defined by borders. section. elevation. 3D view. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project. begin by first creating sheets. 275 . Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create.

Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter 2006-01.rvt. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. For Client Name. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box. enter Office Structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. enter Initial Draft. The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. For Project Number. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Edit for Project Address. click Training Files. and click OK. enter 31 March 2006.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View. click Sheet. Anytown. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. MA 12345. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. For Project Status. enter J. 6 Click OK. For Project Name. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Smith. 4 Click OK. right-click.

enter S-1. enter Plans and Elevations. click Modify. 15 In the Views dialog box. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 . The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. 13 Click OK. Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 . click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the title block. 9 In the Project Browser.Unnamed. do the following: ■ ■ . and click to place the view. and click Add View to Sheet. 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. on the Options Bar. click Add View. select Structural Plan: Level 2. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name. expand Sheets (all). 11 When the title block highlights.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar.

27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. right-click. right-click. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". 25 In the Element Properties dialog. specify 1/16" = 1'. clear Crop View.0" for View Scale. and click View Properties. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. Under Extents. Click OK. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. 24 With the view selected. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Element Properties. under Graphics. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.0" for View Scale. right-click. and click Element Properties. Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Add View. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. specify 1/16" = 1'. and click OK.17 With the view selected. 22 In the Views dialog box. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. select Elevation: South Elevation. NOTE If necessary. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.

and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress.Perspective. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. NOTE If necessary. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.NOTE If necessary. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. click Add View. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 . Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280. 32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view.rvt. Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Views dialog box. select 3D View: East Section . 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

you add a new sheet to the project. incrementally named S-2 Section Views. The new sheet. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280. and on the Options Bar. under Identity Data. under Sheets (all). 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click . and click OK. and adjust the scale of the view. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. click Sheet.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. 3 Select the title block. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. is displayed in the Project Browser.rvt. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. and click OK. add a section view.

5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans. click . Create a section view of Level 2. select 1/16" = 1'. 2 On the View Toolbar. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown. double-click Level 2.0" for Scale. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 . click Section.

8 In the Views dialog box. right-click. 10 With the view selected. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. double-click S-2 Section Views. under Sheets (all). 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . specify 3/16" = 1' . and click OK. under Graphics. 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. NOTE If necessary. Create a callout view. click Add View. and click Properties. and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser. select Section: Section 1. 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sections (Building Sections).■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. double click Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0" for View Scale.

under Sheets (all). 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and position it approximately as shown. as shown. 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon.15 On the View Toolbar. 20 In the Project Browser. double-click S-2 Section Views. specify 3/4" = 1'. and click Properties. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 19 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). click Callout of section 1. right-click. and click OK. 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and drag the view onto the sheet. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. under Graphics. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . click Callout.0" for View Scale. click . 21 With the view selected.

284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Creating a Detail Library on page 284. Instead of having to draw these details for every project.TYPICAL DETAILS. you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details.rvt. you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project.1 . Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects. expand Sheets (all). and double-click S. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise.NOTE If necessary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail.

Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet. 3 In the Save Views dialog. select Drawing Sheet: S. Enter Detail Library for the folder name. Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder. and click OK. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 . Open the new folder.TYPICAL DETAILS.1 . 2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members.

Click Save. Select both Footing Section views.■ ■ Under File name.TYPICAL DETAILS. Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. only the 2D elements will be inserted. ■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog. however. Under Views. Click Save. do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views.1 . 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. Click OK. Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. For File name. NOTE When you save your file. clear Drawing Sheet: S. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details. select Show drafting views only. Only the drafting views will be displayed. 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . when you insert these views into a new project. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. Importing Details from the Library on page 287. enter Footing Section. 6 In the Save Views dialog.

rvt. close the warning dialog that appears. Click OK. you learn how import details from the newly created library. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens. 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S. Click Open. Importing Details from the Library | 287 .rvt. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail.Importing Details from the Library In this exercise.1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.TYPICAL DETAILS. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise. click Training Files. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Click OK. a duplicate types dialog displays. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

expand Sheets (all). Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.rvt. and double-click S. 7 In the Open dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in.5 In the Project Browser. select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION. 8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. Select the file FOOTING SECTION. 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.1 .TYPICAL DETAILS. Click Open.

Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Importing Details from the Library | 289 . a duplicate types dialog appears.■ Click OK. Click OK.

290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. Select the file Footing Sections.rvt.9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.

■ Click Open. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Importing Details from the Library | 291 . Click OK. select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. Click OK. 11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views. a duplicate types dialog appears.

Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project. concrete schedule. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. On construction documents. Finally. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents. and so on). Using Legends on page 292. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. On construction documents.

Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 . Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Symbol. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol . 4 In the Rename View dialog box. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand Legends. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head . and click Rename. enter Symbol Legend for Name. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown.

Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. select Text: 1/4" Arial text. enter 1/8" text for Name. click Edit/New. and click OK. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. you create a text type with the necessary size. enter 1/8" for Text Size. 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. 8 In the Type Selector. On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click Duplicate. and click OK twice. click Text. 9 On the Options bar. 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 12 Under Text.

and double-click S-1 . expand Sheets (all).Spacer Weld Symbol .Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. 17 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.15 Working from the top down. Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 . 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . click Symbol Legend.Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

29 In the Parameter Properties dialog.24 In the Schedule Properties dialog. This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model. The new rebar field is added. 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Top Bars for Name. click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Click OK. click OK. and click View Properties. click Edit for Value. Click OK. select REBAR. Under Heading. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 30 Under Scheduled fields. 312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . enter Bottom Bars. click Add Parameter. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. Under Type of Parameter. under Fields. Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. The Rebar field is renamed. select Text. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields.

as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure.Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. under the Fields parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Bottom Bars. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. click Edit for Value. and enter REBAR. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. under Bottom Bars. For Joists B2. 35 Click the new heading. select2-#5C. and under Top Bars. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Schedules/Quantities. The schedule is updated with the joist information. For Joists B3. A new blank cell is created above the columns. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. under Bottom Bars. select 2-#5C. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule.rvt. click Group. enter 2-#5 C. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. and under Top Bars. click File menu ➤ Save As. and under Top Bars. Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 . enter 2-#7A 1-#7B. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. 34 On the Options bar.

Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. 8 Under Joist B1. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Volume. Click Calculated Value. The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists. enter 3 for Cost. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Under Available Fields. click OK.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. Select Number for Type. and press ENTER. and click Add. Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. ■ Click OK. Because cost is a type parameter. click OK. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. select Cost.

click Field Format. Under Field formatting. click Edit for Value. Under Rounding. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In the Format dialog. under Formatting. Under Units. and press ENTER. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. select Calculate totals. click Edit for Value. 9 Under Joist B2. select Total Cost. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Unit Symbol. click OK. and click View Properties. enter 1. Under Field Formatting. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Fields. select Currency. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. under Formatting. select $. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab.NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. and click View Properties. Click OK.5 for Cost. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. clear Use default settings. select 2 Decimal Places. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 . Under Fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. select Total Cost. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

■ Click OK. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316. click OK.rvt. The next lesson uses a new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars. click File menu ➤ Save As. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 20 Proceed to the next lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 .1. NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. and Ground Level. Garage Level . 2 Right-click the column schedule. select Foundation. The schedule is created automatically. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. click Edit for Hidden Levels. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Toolbar. and select View Properties. click Graphical Column Schedule.Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Other. and zoom in on the schedule. click OK.

Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column.NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below.

click Edit. under Vertical Heights.Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click OK. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 . enter 3". enter 3". under Horizontal Widths. and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and for Grid Appearance. In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. ■ In the Element Properties dialog. For Column Locations. and select View Properties. Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column. select Group Similar Locations. for Below Bottom Level.

you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations. and select View Properties. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. click File menu ➤ Save As. and then select Bold and Italic. click Edit for Value. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. To save changes. 2 Right-click the schedule. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. and click OK. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1.Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view. select Courier New from the drop-down list. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes.rvt. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance. Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. For Level text. 9 Right-click the schedule. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text Appearance. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. and select View Properties. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Graphics. and then select Bold. under Graphical Column Schedules.

Enter 2" for Level Names. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations. enter Steel Column Schedule for Title.5 Click the Grid Appearance tab. 9 Click OK. under Identity Data. Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 . 7 Click OK.

13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . select Vertical. Under Orientation. 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. 11 On the Options bar. 17 On the Options bar. 18 In the Filter dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. and clear Leader. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag. and click OK. Click Apply. clear Structural Columns. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Structural Column Tags. Click OK. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule. click . click Vertical. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click 20 On the Toolbar. .19 On the Toolbar. and zoom in on one of the column tags. and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. and select View Properties. Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 . Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. click .

click Sheet. Under Column Locations per Segment. click File menu ➤ Save As.0". do the following. The next exercise uses a new training file. expand Sheets (all). and click OK. To save changes. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Steel Column Schedule. 5 On the Options bar. or close the exercise file without saving changes.22 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. and select the titleblock. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter 10. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 1/4" = 1' . Under Sheet Number.rvt. 23 Click OK. ■ ■ Under View Scale. click Training Files. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 3 In the Project Browser. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324. you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter S-3. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar.

and click to place the view. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. and double-click Sheet S-4. click ■ ■ ■ . and click OK. and on the Options Bar. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . click Add View. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. Under Sheet Number. click Sheet. expand Sheets (all).The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers. 8 In the Views dialog. 15 On the Options bar. Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. Click OK. click . 14 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 10 Select the schedule. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar. select Steel Column Schedule. 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. enter S-4. and select the titleblock. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. click OK. Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. select Graphical Column Schedule. under Extents.

19 On the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Graphical Column Schedule. and click Next. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. enter Revit_Project. expand Sheets (all). and drag it onto the sheet.mdb. and click OK to create the database. under Graphical Column Schedule. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. The next exercise uses a new training file. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 26 On the Project Browser. click Training Files. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 8 In the New Database dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. click the File Data Source tab. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click Create. 9 Under Directories. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. and click to place the view. under Database. 6 Click Finish. click OK. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click Next. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). To save changes. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and click to place the view. 22 On the Project Browser. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. select a location for the database file. expand Sheets (all). and drag it onto the sheet. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 3 Click New. 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. and click to place the view. 25 On the Project Browser. 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. under Database Name. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. under Graphical Column Schedule. and drag it onto the sheet. and double-click Sheet S-6. click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. 10 When the confirmation message displays. click OK.rvt.

Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project. To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). 14 Proceed to the next tutorial. For example. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. and save the exercise file with a unique name. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. so that each table of elements includes an ID column. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . Steel Details on page 329. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next tutorial uses a new training file.

328 .

revise a callout view. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. and add these views to a sheet. 2 Select . revise an existing elevation view. and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. and open Imperial\i_RST_DET. This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson. and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). expand Views (all). You cut a section in plan. and double-click Level 4. 329 .Steel Details 9 In this tutorial. Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Structural Plans. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based).

click Section. select the elevation crop view. Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. under Structural Plans. 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 4 In the elevation view. and select 3/4" =1' .3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view.0". 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Select . and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. double-click Level 4.

13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and select 1/2" =1' . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. double-click West Elevation.0". and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible. A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall. 12 Select the section crop view. click Modify. and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. 10 On the Design Bar.9 Draw a section as shown. 15 Select .

and click Add View. and click Add View. 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet.0". right-click S-6 . select E1 30x42 Horizontal.Steel Details. right-click S-6 .17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and click Add View. 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. 24 In the Views dialog. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 30 In the Views dialog. and click Rename. 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet. right-click S-6 . elevation.Steel Details. 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 26 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. enter Steel Details for Name. and click to place the view. and select 3/4" =1' . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 29 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click to place the view. and click to place the view. 20 In the Project Browser. Create a sheet and place the section. 27 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. 23 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. select Section: Section 1.Steel Details. expand Sheets (all). and click OK. and click OK. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.

click braces meet at Level 4. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 . Detailing Steel on page 333. You will sketch the lines in a model view. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress.rvt. and a facade support detail to the model. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. Detailing Steel In this lesson. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser. you add a welded bracing detail. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. double click Elevation 1-a.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. . i_RST_DET-in progress. a bolted angle detail.

6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown.3 Select the left brace. 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. TIP After establishing the line direction. enter the value. and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange. 334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Lines.

11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. 10 Click to place this line. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . click . 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. and select Copy. enter 2' 6" for Offset. and click to place the detail line. A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line. click Offset. 14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown. you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line.Next. 13 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. select Numerical.

16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.15 On the Design Bar. and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown. click Modify. and select the horizontal detail line. 336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Detail Lines.

click the left top weld annotation. 24 On the Options Bar. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. drag it into the view as shown. 21 Select the weld symbol. 23 On the Design Bar. Repeat for the right bottom value. and enter 3/8. and select the weld symbol. Repeat for the left bottom value. 20 Click Modify. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 .18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. click Add a Leader. and enter a period. and click to place it. click Modify. and press DELETE to delete this element. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser. 25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0.

27 Right-click the new weld symbol. Click OK. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol.26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown. and click Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural. select Weld All Around. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . Under Graphics.

32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TYPICAL for text as shown. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8. and enter 3/8" PL for text. 31 Draw a text leader to the plate. double-click Section 1. click . click Text. under Sections. In the first part of the exercise. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . click Text. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_DET-in progress. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. 30 On the Options Bar. Then you add some annotations.Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . 33 On the Options Bar. you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project.

340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown. click Detail Lines.2 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section. Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown. click . click Text. select L4x4x5/16.

8 Enter the text notes as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. i_RST_DET-in progress. click Level 4 at Grid 4. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. you add members to support exterior wall glazing. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 . double-click West Elevation. Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341.

7. 8 On the Edit toolbar. and select the left side of the column as shown. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. select C5x6. and click to place it. 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area. 6 Click Modify and select the channel. 7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice. click . 4 In the Project Browser. On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section. move it to the position shown.

10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown. Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 . select the back of the channel as shown.9 Next.

In the next lesson. under Sheets. A325 BOLT. click Text. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.11 In the Project Browser. a new training file is supplied. 16 In the Project Browser.7. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown. Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344. You can save the open file if you wish. double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view. select the bolt. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. 14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. 18 Proceed to the next lesson.

click Training Files. select 1 1/2" = 1' .Deck Span Transition. select Detail Component. Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Typical Detail . In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Drafting Views.Section: W18x35. click Drafting View. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes . Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown.Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 On the Design bar. select K-Series Bar Joist . 2 In the New Drafting dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name.0".Deck Span Transition. Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam.Side: 14K3. and double-click Typical Detail . select Detail Component. 5 In the Type Selector. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 . 9 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt. 7 On the Design bar. click Modify. Under Scale. click Modify. Click OK. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component.

18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Repeating Detail.5 WR 22. select Detail Component. select AISC Tube Shapes . click Modify. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown. 21 On the Design bar.125.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. 19 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click the end of the joist. 23 In the Type Selector. select Detail Component. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. select Roof Decking-Side: 1. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. 346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 17 On the Design bar. click Modify. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown. 13 In the Type Selector.12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

29 On the Design bar. and click to place it. clear Symbol Left. select Field Weld. click Modify. 27 In the Type Selector. and select Symbol Right. click Modify. Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. select Detail Component. 31 On the Design Bar. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Other.25 On the Design bar. 32 Select the weld symbol. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. drag it into the view as shown. click Modify. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . 28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. Click OK. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3.

35 On the Options Bar. click Text. click Add a Leader. 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.34 On the Design Bar. 36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown. click Modify. click Modify. 38 On the Options Bar. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text. 40 On the Design bar. Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . and select the weld symbol. click Text.

and navigate to a folder location of your choice. 44 Proceed to the next tutorial.43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351.

350 .

you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson. you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure. 351 . you model reinforcement in a concrete beam. Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure. Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library.Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial.

2 On the Toolbar. click Training Files. 352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area.rvt. positioned to the right of the drawing area. under Detail Views (Detail). This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Beam Detail. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click .

6 Hover over the section view. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. scroll down the list of available shapes. select Rebar Bar: #4. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. 7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. For training purposes. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. and select Rebar Shape: S3.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 .

15 On the Design Bar.8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. click Modify. 9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar. and on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. and select Rebar Shape: 01. select Maximum Spacing. enter 0’ 6”. approximately as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. and select Rebar Shape: T9. scroll down the list of available shapes. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. scroll down the list of available shapes. Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For Spacing. Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. scroll down the list of available shapes. 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view. 13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. and select Rebar Shape: 01. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 . For Layout. select Rebar Bar: #6. and on the Options Bar. select Fixed Number. enter 4. approximately as shown.18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view. For Quantity. Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed. Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

select both View unobscured and View as solid. click OK. 30 On the Toolbar. and click OK. 29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select Detail Level: Fine. 28 On the View Control Bar. under Graphics. under 3D Views. for 3D View. click . 26 In the Element Properties dialog. and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click .23 On the Options Bar. View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. click Edit for View Visibility States. double-click 3D.

. Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar. Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 .Notice that the rebar sets are visible. and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam. click 32 Select the rebar as shown.

34 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . The next exercise uses a new training file.33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required. To save changes. 35 Proceed to the next exercise.

double-click Column Detail. 2 On the Toolbar. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area.Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise.rvt. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. click Training Files. click . The Rebar Shape Browser launches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. positioned to the right of the drawing area. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. under Detail Views (Detail). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 . This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. you model reinforcement in a concrete column. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed. select Rebar Bar: #4. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector. For training purposes. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. click Modify. select Maximum Spacing. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. scroll down the list of available shapes.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. select Rebar Bar: #4. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For Spacing. and select Rebar Shape: T1. enter 0’ 3”. 8 On the Design Bar. For Layout. 6 Hover over the section view. and on the Options Bar.

Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. click Modify. scroll down the list of available shapes. select Fixed Number. For Quantity.10 On the Design Bar. 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown. For Layout. select Rebar Bar: #8. and on the Options Bar. 12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . click (Copy). 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. 17 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. and select Rebar Shape: 00. Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. as shown. enter 3.

Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown.

select both View unobscured and View as solid. and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 . select Detail Level: Fine.22 On the Options Bar. click Edit for View Visibility States. double-click 3D. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. click . click OK. under Graphics. under 3D Views. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click . View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. 29 On the Toolbar. for 3D View. 27 On the View Control Bar. and click OK.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. you model area reinforcement in a structural wall. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise uses a new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 31 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364.rvt. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

click . select 3/4" = 1' . under Structural Plans.0" for Scale. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 . 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Toolbar. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. double-click Garage Level-1. 6 On the View Control Bar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click Section. 7 In the section view. select the crop view. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure.

under 3D Views. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall.

and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode. 11 On the Options Bar. The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below.10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 .

Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. click Major Direction Edge. 13 On the Design Bar. 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Finish Sketch.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. To change the major direction. and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown. adjacent to the major bars. double-click Section 3. on the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall.

Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 .The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed. Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement.

click . clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction. 16 On the Options Bar. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and click OK. under Layers. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement.

under Construction. enter 30. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. and click OK. and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30. Click OK. for Value. enter 30. under Layers.Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view. For Interior Minor Number of Lines. select Fixed Number. For Interior Major Number of Lines. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 .

22 On the Options Bar.Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. click Modify. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. change all Bar Types to #4. 28 Using the drag control. 20 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. and click Zoom to Fit. click Tag ➤ By Category. 26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. . under Layers. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . double-click Garage Level-1. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown.rvt. 2 On the Toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. under Structural Plans.

4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Section.0". and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. 7 In the section view. select the crop view. For Detail Level. For Model Graphics Style. select 1/4" = 1' . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale.3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. select Shading w/Edges. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select Fine.

click . Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 . 9 Select the concrete slab as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. draw an area reinforcement box as shown. double-click Garage Level -1.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. to enter sketch mode. under Structural Plans. 11 Using the line tool.

376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . under Sections (Building Sections). double-click Section 4.12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch.

16 In the Element Properties dialog. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar. click . 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. 23 Select the rebar tag. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. click . and click OK. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . click Modify.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed. Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement. change all Bar Types to #4. under Layers. 22 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Attached End. under Layers. 24 Using the drag control. clear Top Major Direction. and click OK.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click Level 3. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser. click . You are now in sketch mode. click Training Files. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. The next exercise uses a new training file. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Select the slab opening. 2 On the Toolbar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. under Structural Plans.

click Finish Sketch. click . click Modify. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 . 8 On the Design Bar.5 On the Options Bar. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop. The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed.

select Shading w/Edges. 16 On the View Control Bar.0". select the crop view.10 On the Options Bar. 17 In the section view. select 1/4" = 1' .Type. select #4. 14 On the Design Bar. For Model Graphics Style. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. for Primary Bar . click Modify. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Fine. 380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view. click Section. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown. For Detail Level. click Create a section view . under Layers. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. click Tag ➤ By Category. Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. . click 19 Select the rebar. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 .NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown. click Modify. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and on the Options Bar. 25 Using the drag control. 24 Select the rebar tag. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. select Free End.

and position the upper drag bar as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. double-click Ground Level. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line.26 Click File menu ➤ Close. . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382. 2 On the Toolbar. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing. 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . draw a pick box. click structure. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser.

click . and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown.4 Press ESC. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 . Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar. 5 Double-click the section bubble. The Section 1 view opens.

9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. select Chain. click (Edit Cut Profile). click Finish Sketch. and click (Line). Sketch 3 lines as shown. 384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .NOTE For training purposes. Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar). 11 On the Design Bar. click (Draw). 10 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. select Boundary between faces. 7 On the Toolbar.

click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 17 On the Sketch tab. click Sketch. The Design Bar changes to sketch mode. click Finish Sketch. 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element. click Sketch. 16 Press ESC. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 14 Select the continuous footing as the host element.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown. Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.

Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .90 deg.NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall. 22 Press ESC. NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. for Hook At Start. click Finish Sketch. 26 Click OK. and click Element Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Sketch tab. This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. select Standard . under Construction.

and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar. 31 Select the end of the straight bar. Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. (Mirror). click wall. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . 30 In the Type Selector. select Rebar Bar: #8. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown.Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular.

Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. 388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Minimum Clear Spacing. enter 4". 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. For Spacing. click Modify. 36 On the Options Bar. 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. 37 Select the rebar set. Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar.

(Pick Elements). Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 . 41 On the Options Bar. Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar.39 On the Design Bar. Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. click 42 Select the footing. click Modify. click (Edit Rebar Cover).

do the following: Click Add. For Description. Click OK. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. enter 0' 2". For Setting.43 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings). enter Exposed/Cast against Earth. 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. click 46 On the Options Bar. . 390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 47 Select the face of the structural wall. Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar. (Pick Faces).

Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. click ■ ■ . select Exposed/Cast against Earth. do the following: Under Description.48 On the Options Bar. 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 . 52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown. Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall. Click OK.

To save changes. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. 392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. 53 Click to select this plane. 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension.The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

click Modify. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. draw a pick box.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. click Training Files. Create section view 1 In the Project Browser. and position the drag bar as shown. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail. click Section. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. under Structural Plans. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. 2 On the Toolbar. click structure.1. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 . and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. . and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Garage Level . 4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C. 6 Click the section line. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. move the cursor down. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

8 Double-click the section bubble. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select the crop view. 10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control.0". and select 3/4" = 1'. 9 In the section view. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .7 Press ESC. The Section 2 view opens.

as shown. click Modify. the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. 14 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. 16 Press the SPACEBAR.NOTE For training purposes. 17 On the Options Bar. select Rebar Bar : #7. do the following: ■ For Layout. until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement. select Maximum Spacing. Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click . Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar. draw a zoom box. The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. 23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown.■ For Spacing. enter 1' 6". and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level .1. 19 Select the rebar set. Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set. 22 On the Edit toolbar. 20 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. click Modify. click (Mirror).

28 On the Options Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. and click Zoom to Fit. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 . 26 On the Toolbar.24 Click to place the rebar. 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host. click . Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. click Sketch. and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click .You are now in sketch mode. Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover. 32 Click to place the rebar. click Finish Sketch.1. 37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears. 34 On the Design Bar. Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar. 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 36 On the Edit toolbar. 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level . 33 Press ESC. 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point.

38 Click to place the rebar. Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 .

400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .40 Press CTRL. and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown.

select View unobscured and View as solid. 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible. double-click 3D. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. and click OK. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 . click Edit for View Visibility States. under 3D Views. 45 In the Project Browser.41 On the Options Bar. for 3D View. click OK. click .

or close the exercise file without saving changes. 50 Proceed to the next tutorial. enter 1' 6". 49 Click File menu ➤ Close. 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Notice the rebar is visible. For Spacing. click . do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. and on the Options Bar. select Maximum Spacing. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar.47 On the Toolbar. Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. click Training Files. baseline.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. By default. radial. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. and ordinate. multi-segmented. 403 . click Dimension. angular. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. and double-click Floor. select it. linear. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building. The dimension types include aligned. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. Dimensioning In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In Revit Structure. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components.rvt.

404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . toward the empty space outside the wall. 6 Move the cursor to the left. and click to place the dimension.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. select it.

7 Click the lock. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. (Undo). Creating Dimensions | 405 . Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. click Modify. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. 8 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. select Wall faces for Prefer. indicating that the dimension can be modified. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it.The dimension displays in the drawing. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. and press DELETE. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. click Dimension. 10 On the Toolbar. click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. The lock displays as locked. 11 Select the dimension. and click to set the dimension location. click the lock to unlock it.

406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. and click to place the dimension. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions). an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. 19 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. In addition. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment.

The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. Select the inside face of the wall. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. as shown. click for Prefer. ■ Creating Dimensions | 407 . 23 On the Design Bar. and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. and click to place the dimension. click Modify. and select Wall faces for Prefer. and press DELETE. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. and place the dimension as shown. Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ . click Dimension. the default dimension option. 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. 26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building.

click . 408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 33 On the Design Bar. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. and click to place the dimension. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. for Dimension String Type. 36 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar. click .Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. click Dimension. click Modify. . select Baseline. Click Apply. click Edit/New. and OK. Move your cursor to the right. 34 On the Options Bar. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join.

40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. Creating Dimensions | 409 . 41 On the Design Bar. and OK. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Ordinate. click . Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Edit/New. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. 43 On the Options Bar. Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1). click Modify.39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. for Dimension String Type. Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. .

click Modify. 53 Proceed to the next exercise.M. Click Apply and OK.D. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2. to each additional element (grids 2 through 5).rvt. Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S.Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1). and enter S.I. (See Architectural Drawing).6" Click Apply and OK. 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step. enter V. 48 In the Dimension Text dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Below.F. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411. 50 In the Dimension Text dialog. Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text.A. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As. do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value. +/. 51 On the Design Bar. click Replace with Text. under Text Fields.A. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.

i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. 11 Place the dimension as shown. and select the exterior face. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. When you place dimensions. 6 Position the cursor over the wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. a different wall selection choice highlights. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. and select it. 3 On the Options Bar. and press TAB repeatedly. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. including the wall centerline. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 . select it. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building.Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. For example. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. However. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. for a multi-segmented dimension. Each time you press TAB. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. and select the exterior face.rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. in some cases. you learn to add. but do not select anything. delete.

The dimension highlights. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and control boxes display on each witness line. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed.

The witness line moves to interior wall face. The witness line is deleted. 15 Click the control box again. but do not select it. 16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building. 17 Right-click the control box.14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. and click Delete Witness Line. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 .

21 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the Options Bar. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. and click Edit Witness Lines. click Modify. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. click Edit/New. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. click . If you right-click the control box. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The full dimension string is displayed.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building. a context menu with different options is displayed. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. 20 To end the editing command.

7 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish.4 In the Type Properties dialog. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. a new training file is provided. when sketching walls. As you create components. For example. The dimension updates as shown. and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Right. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . if 2 or more walls are colinear. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. a lock symbol immediately displays.rvt. then Up for Read Convention. This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on. Under Text. In the next exercise. click Modify. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. 5 Click OK twice. not the direction it is read. 6 On the Design Bar. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort.

indicating that the Align command is active.Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. The symbol changes to a closed lock. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Multiple Alignment. The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. 3 Click the lock. the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. When you align 2 components. click (Align). The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. 6 Select the short wall to the left.

The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. click Modify. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . and drag it downward. 9 On the Design Bar.7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). click (Undo) once to undo the move. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. 12 Click the right wall. 11 On the Toolbar.

clear Multiple Alignment. 16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. 14 On the Options Bar. Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar. 418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click (Align).Move the walls to verify the alignment. 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan.

The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. on the Design Bar. click . and align the windows. 22 Align the remaining windows. 20 Click the lock to unlock it. as shown. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall.The 2 windows align. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. 21 On the Toolbar. A lock is displayed. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 . indicating the constraint. 19 To view the constraint. 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. click Modify.

Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420. and notice that it includes 5 openings. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. i_RST_Alignment-in progress. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.rvt. 1 View the south wall. 420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. click Dimension. 6 Select the south wall. For Prefer. Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 . You can save the open file if you wish. For Pick. the windows). Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. click (Create Aligned Dimensions). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select Entire Walls. Click Options. 7 Move your cursor below the south wall. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. and click to add the dimension. The 2 vertical walls highlight. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. verify that Wall centerlines is selected. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. a new training file is provided. In the next exercise. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise. 5 Click OK. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.2 On the Design Bar. select Openings and Widths.

rvt. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click to create the second leader point. expand Structural Plans. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. select Leader. click . 6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and for Relative Base. 5 On the Options Bar. select Current Level. Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. 4 In the Type Selector. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative).■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click to place the spot dimension. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown. and double-click New Roof. Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. 2 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser. Move the cursor to the left.

11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. and for Relative Base. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 . select Current Level. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. select Leader. Move the cursor to the right. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. click Modify. click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. . Click to place the spot dimension. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click to create the second leader point. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown.■ On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar.

424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 15 In the Type Selector. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. click . Click to create the second leader point. 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing. and double-click Foundation. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Leader. and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). and Current Level for Relative Base. expand Structural Plans. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser.■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor up and to the right.

20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. ■ Click OK. for Single/Upper Value Prefix. Click to create the third leader point. Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed. do the following: Under Text. ■ On the Design Bar.■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. click ■ . 19 On the Options Bar. Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. click Modify. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . enter TOF=. 21 On the Design Bar.

under Text. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 29 On the View Control Bar. Click Apply. Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate. select Medium. click Modify. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click OK. ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click . for Detail Level. and double-click South Elevation. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. For Text Location.Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. and then OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. click Edit/New. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. select In-line with Leader.

Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. click . click Edit/New. Click to place the spot coordinate. Move the cursor to the right. 33 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. and then OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 On the Design Bar. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates. For Elevation Indicator. Click to create the second leader point. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. click OK. For Text Location. under Text. enter EL. click Modify. select In-line with Leader. click Modify. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 .

and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure. expand Structural Plans. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag.38 Click File menu ➤ Close. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . a new training file is provided. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Annotating on page 428. Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Beam Annotations. You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. click Training Files. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can save the open file if you wish. and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view. In the next lesson. Annotating In this lesson. Tagging Beams In this exercise. and double-click Level 2. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. 39 Proceed to the next lesson.rvt.

5 On the Design Bar. click Beam Annotations. do the following: ■ Under Placement. Click OK. Click Settings. 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog.The Beam Annotations dialog opens. select All beams in current plan view. for Horizontal End Offset. select All selected beams in current plan view. and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. NOTE For training purposes. and click OK. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view. enter 1". do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement. ■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 . In the Placement Settings dialog. 6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view.

■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog.Live. click Structural Framing Tag.0 kip for End Reaction . ■ Under Annotation location and type. enter 10. select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar. The end reaction value is added to the selected beams. ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog. under Select Element to Place. and click OK. 430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click OK. to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. click the Level beams in plan tab. and click OK. Click . under Analysis Results. Under Structural Framing Tag. click .

12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). Tagging Beams | 431 . and on the Options Bar. click Apply.9 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. and then OK. enter W14. and on the Options Bar. under Type Mark. . . click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Apply. click Modify. 11 Right-click the open area above the model. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and then OK. under Type Mark. click Edit/New. enter W18. click OK. click Edit/New.

The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. You are now in the Family Editor. select the W14X22 beam tag. Enter Structural Framing Tag . under Label. click Edit. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click parameter(s) to a label).by Type Mark for File name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. click OK. and on the Options bar. Click Save. click Load into Projects. 28 On the Family Design Bar. while pressing CTRL. Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click the structural label.20 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit Family. select Structural Framing Tag . 29 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. 27 In the Save As dialog. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing.by Type Mark: Standard. 24 In the Edit Label dialog. 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and on the Options Bar. click Yes. for Value. select the active file. under Category Parameters. and click OK. click the W18X40 beam tag. 31 In the Type Selector. select Type Mark. click OK. click . and. Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags.

Tagging Beams | 433 . do the following: Click Check None to clear all items. 33 On the Options bar. 34 In the Filter dialog. and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. Select Structural Framing Tags. click ■ ■ (Filter).32 Enter ZF.

The new beam tag is applied to all beams.by Type Mark: Standard.■ Click OK. Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 36 To save your changes. select Structural Framing Tag . and save the exercise file with a unique name. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click File menu ➤ Save As. 35 In the Type Selector.

When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.NOTE For training purposes. and on the Options Bar. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps. Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser. 40 Click File ➤ Close. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. You can save the open file if you wish. and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit Family. In the next exercise a new training file is provided. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You are now in the Family Editor. 3 Click the structural label. click Beam System Tag. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit Label. click Yes. and double-click Level 2. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435. click Training Files. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types. expand Structural Plans. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 . and on the Options Bar.

436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . enter C=1/2". add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. for Sample Value. for Vertical Align. enter ] (close bracket). for Spaces. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. Select parameter 2. for Prefix. (Add parameter). Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. and for Suffix.Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog. select Camber Size. Under Category Parameters. enter S1. for Sample Value. and for Suffix. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sample Value. click OK. select 3. enter [ (open bracket). select Top. enter W14X22. . enter ( (left parenthesis). and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. select Number of studs. and select Break. for Prefix. select Reference Planes. Select parameter 3. do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab. enter ) (right parenthesis). Under Visibility. under Graphics. and click OK. add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1. 8 On the Options Bar. ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides). click . ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

14 Click Modify. Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser. 13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. and double-click Level 2. click Load into Project. and click Yes. and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. 15 On the Design Bar. expand Structural Plans. In the Reload Family dialog. View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 . click Override parameter values of existing types. 12 Select the text on the beam label. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities.■ Click OK.

438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Worksets on page 439. and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference. 19 On the Options Bar.18 Click one of the W18x40 beams. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: Under Structural. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. click ■ . ■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As. Click OK.

however.) is called a workset. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users. beams. Using Worksharing. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment.rvt. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project. All other team members can view this workset. they cannot make changes to it. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. etc. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. slabs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In Revit Structure 2009. Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. In this tutorial. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. click Training Files. 439 . You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. this collection of building elements (such as roofs. In the next exercise. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance.Worksets 12 On many building projects. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. In the left pane of the Open dialog. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets.

imagine 5 users including yourself. The Worksets dialog is displayed. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. In this simple training project. a small number of team members are working on the structural model. and Views. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). under Show. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. one team member is assigned to the slabs. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. 5 Under Show. 3 In the Worksets dialog. Therefore. click New. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. For training purposes. Only User-Created worksets should display. a second user is assigned the roof. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets . clear Families. You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. a third is assigned all beams and columns. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. enter Beams and Columns. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. In this case. and notice all are editable by you. Project Standards. For training purposes. 7 In the New Workset dialog.

Click OK. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view. 8 In the Worksets dialog. 11 In the New Workset dialog.■ Click OK. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. 13 In the New Workset dialog. click New. enter Foundation. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. click New. 9 In the New Workset dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. 10 In the Worksets dialog. Click OK. Clear Visible by default in all views. enter Elevator Shafts. Click OK. click New. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 . Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. enter Slabs.

The roof should only be visible in specific views. 15 In the New Workset dialog. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. click New. click New. Clear Visible by default in all views.14 In the Worksets dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Clear Visible by default in all views. Click OK. 19 In the New Workset dialog. 17 In the New Workset dialog. click New. Again. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. this improves performance. this improves performance. enter Garage Ramp. Again. Click OK. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. Click OK. ■ 16 In the Worksets dialog. enter Roof.

this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps. 20 In the Worksets dialog. under Show. 25 In the Worksets dialog. enter Worksets Project . but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 22 In the Save As dialog. Now that you have created the central file. The next step is to create the central file. for file name. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 . The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. 23 Click Save. click Non Editable. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise.You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 27 On the right side of the dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Central.

enter Initial Central File Setup. Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open. Assigning Worksets on page 445. click File menu ➤ Close. 28 In the Worksets dialog. notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing.Central on the network drive. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 In the Save to Central dialog. click OK. 36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. and click Open. and click Save. navigate to a folder on your local computer. under Comments. 35 In the Save As dialog. 33 Select the file. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets .In the Worksets dialog. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 After the file is saved. and click OK. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project .

5 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. You then created the central file. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. Assigning Worksets | 445 .In this exercise. select Beams and Columns. 6 Click OK. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Assigning Worksets In this exercise. 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. In the Worksets dialog. you assign the structural columns workset to User1. and created a local file. checked in all worksets. 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. you enabled Worksharing on a project. notice that all worksets are available for editing. 2 Click Cancel. click . 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. for Workset.

12 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. click Check None. 9 Click Cancel. click . under Borrowers for Workset1. 13 Select Structural Columns. Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements.The Worksets dialog. notice that User1 is listed. 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets .

All structural columns in the model are highlighted. but the columns remain highlighted. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Assigning Worksets | 447 . 14 Right-click one of the columns. for Workset. select Beams and Columns. The puzzle-piece icons disappear. 15 On the Options Bar. and click Make Elements Editable. and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable. click .

18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. clear Borrowed Elements. 448 | Chapter 12 Worksets .17 Click OK. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1. and click OK. to save the local file. under After save relinguish editable. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. 2 Click Open. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.

In the Worksets dialog. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 . select Workset1. click . 5 Click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog. click Check None. 4 In the Worksets dialog. notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. 8 In the Filter dialog. and select Floors. Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1.

The slabs are now assigned for Workset1. 10 On the Options Bar. select Slabs. for Workset.9 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 12 Click OK. All floors are highlighted. click .

This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. click . assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts. 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Using the steps described in the previous procedure. and the garage ramp. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . 14 On the Options Bar. foundation. click the Worksets tab. Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click OK. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. 18 Enter VV. select Roof. for Workset.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown.

Roof. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and Slabs. 23 Check Beams and Columns. The elements are now visible in the view. 452 | Chapter 12 Worksets . and then click Apply and OK.20 Clear Beams and Columns. and then click Apply and OK. 22 Enter VV. Roof. clear the box next to the desired element. 21 The elements are now hidden from the view. and Slabs. click the Worksets tab. To turn off additional elements. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. and click OK. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and proceed to Create a local copy. each user must check out worksets. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and reset the User name to your computer login name. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Throughout the process. return to the Settings dialog. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. skip the following section. under User name. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. click Options. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file.rvt. 28 Click OK. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. instructions are staggered. User 2: Create a local file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 3 On the Settings menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. make elements editable. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. two users access the central file through a network connection. specifically sequenced. consider that person to be User 1. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 27 Under Comment. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. and reload the latest changes. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this.25 In the Save to Central dialog. This is a system setting. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 . please do so before continuing. enter User 2. and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. For training purposes. one user has already created a local file. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. In the following section of this exercise. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. For training purposes.

You now have a local copy of the project. under Open Worksets. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 In the Project Browser. User 1: Check out worksets. select all the User-Created worksets. 11 In the Save As dialog. This file is for your use only. 8 Click Open. and click OK. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. and double-click 3D-Atrium. and select Yes for Editable. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and move it. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. select Specify. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. You are now the owner of that workset. 15 Select the Foundation workset. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. If you only have one workset checked out. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset.7 In the Open dialog. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. expand 3D Views. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. it becomes the active workset. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 16 Click OK. In addition. and click Save. modify the structural model. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. If it is not open. select the central file and. 22 Click OK. open it now. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. and select Yes for Editable. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.

User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser.A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. select a footing. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. and move it. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 . expand 3D Views. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. 28 Click OK. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. and double-click 3D-Atrium. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2.

You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof. However. and click OK. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 38 On the Design Bar. the Visible by default option was not selected. select Roof to turn on its visibility. click Modify. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. This is because when the Roof workset was created. Therefore. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. Even though the Roof workset is active. select Yes for Editable. under Structural Plans. click Visibility/Graphics. Click Yes. User 1: Reload latest worksets. double-click Roof. click Pick Supports. The changes User 2 made are apparent. click the Worksets tab. and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 34 Select Roof. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 39 On the View menu. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets. click Slab. 37 In the Design Bar.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and click OK. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. 35 On the Project Browser. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset.

Check out worksets. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. you need to set up your central and local files. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This exercise requires two users and. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. In this exercise. 44 Click OK. Each user checked out worksets. Each user must have network access to the central file. you save the training file as a central file. leave this file open in its current state. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. throughout this training. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. leave this file open in its current state. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. There are specific instructions for each user. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. and these problems are rectified. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). select them. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file. In subsequent steps.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. In the final exercise of this tutorial. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. 2 In the Worksets dialog. and click Open. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. As each of you work. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. if any User-Created worksets are not open. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them.

User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. and double-click 3D-Atrium. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 11 Move the footing.3 Select the Foundation workset. and click OK. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select Foundation. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . and click OK. select Beams and Columns. select the Beams and Columns workset. You are now the owner of that workset. expand 3D Views. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 7 Under Active Workset. select a footing. 4 Under Active Workset. At this point. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. and select Yes for Editable. After you submit the request. 6 In the Worksets dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. You are now the owner of that workset. and select Yes for Editable.

In this case. click Check Now. you requested permission to edit the element. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 . and the other user granted it. to Local. 16 Click Close. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. Project Coordination on page 461. and notice the footing is in the new location. select the request submitted by User 2. 20 In the Save to Central dialog. select the following. and click OK. User 1 and 2: Save to Central.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. 18 Click OK. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 15 Click Grant. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial.

460 .

and columns for any future modifications. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. In the tutorial. reviews each change individually. which can be accepted. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. walls. and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door.rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. Once each change has been reviewed. Click OK to open the file. In this tutorial. depending on the impact to the design. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model. Starting a New Project on page 149. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. floors. and the copy monitor feature was activated. or postponed. Finally. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. levels. a warning is displayed. click Training Files. Finally. Coordination Review In this lesson. rejected. 461 .

6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Apply. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. 7 Enter ZF. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. and then click OK. double-click Level 3. and click OK. select the Revit Links tab. 8 On the View Toolbar. 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After.1 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Click . under Structural Plans. Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Coordination for Discipline.rvt. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. click .

The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows. click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. and click Wireframe.9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. . 13 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Toolbar. Click to select the linked file. click as shown. On the View Control Bar. . Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. click the Model Graphics Style control. and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select .

The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. and click Apply. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. These messages identify elements that were deleted. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . and then click Show. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. Accept Difference. In the Action column. Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window. and click Show. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. Reject. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches. select the remaining messages. Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. press SHIFT. moved. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible. or changed in some way from the architect’s file. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. Actions include: Postpone.

and click Show.rvt: Grids: Grid:B. ■ For Action.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change. click . Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . Click the message i_RBD_After. The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window. select Modify Grid B. and click Apply. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved. Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar.

20 In the Coordination Review dialog. and click Apply. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view. press SHIFT. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. and select the remaining messages. expand Maintain wall position. do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls. Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. For Action. ■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .

12" Concrete. Select Postpone for Action. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 . and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress. In the Edit Comment dialog. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. In the Coordination Review dialog.The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Click OK. 22 In the Coordination Review dialog. and OK. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding. Click the Add Comment field. Click the Add Comment field. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. Select Postpone for Action.8" Masonry. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible. enter Need to discuss with architect. enter Need to discuss with architect. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing. click Apply. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog.

you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway. Interference Check In this exercise.rvt for Categories from.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway.24 Proceed to the next exercise. The default table compares elements within the same project. select i_RBD_After. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Interference Check on page 468. The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project. i_RST_Coordination-in progress. 2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project.Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project. and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project. Interference Check | 469 . select Structural Columns.

470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns. 5 In the Interference Report dialog. A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown.4 Click OK.

rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread. enter Columns vs. Interference Check | 471 . ■ Select i_RBD_After. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. select a folder location on your local computer.There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway. ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Click Save. Stair Check. Under Save as type. and that it interferes with the stairway. select Revit Interference Report (*.html). Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33. Each representing a different level. Click Export to generate an interference report. Under File name.

9 In the Interference Check dialog. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. click Close. 11 Click OK. 10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project.rvt for Categories from.7 In the Interference Report dialog. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway. select i_RBD_After. and Doors for the Revit Architecture project.

do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors. Interference Check | 473 . Select i_RBD_After. Under File name.rvt: Doors: Door Single. Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ . Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows. ■ Click Export to generate an interference report. Under Save as type. also the brace interferes with the opening.html). Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. enter Brace vs.12 In the Interference Report dialog. select a folder location on your local computer. Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows. Door opening. select Revit Interference Report (*.

Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. You can create a sequence of revisions. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. 4 Click on the value for Description. click Revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. click Training Files. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'.■ Click Save. click Close. Using Revision Tracking on page 474. and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. When you use this option. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. and enter 2/15/06. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.rvt. 15 In the Interference Report dialog. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. For example. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. if the active revision is number 1. In general. When Issued is selected. a new training file is provided. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . yet as concise as possible. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. In the next lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Revisions dialog. If you select By Project. This is the date the revisions were identified. the revision is locked and issued to the field.

In most instances. Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser. Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click near grid line B. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. 4 In the drawing area.If Visible is not selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. double-click S. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. and OK. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. Revision clouds have read-only properties.1 . The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. including revision number and revision date. under Sheets (all). you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. click Revision Cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 7 Click Apply. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. However. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.Level 3 Framing Plan. and select Activate View.

the remaining revisions for the project are documented. In this tutorial. 4 Click on the value for Description. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. When Issued is selected. 3 Click on the value for Release Date. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .rvt. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. click Revisions. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and enter 2/20/06. yet as concise as possible. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. NOTE At this point. 2 In the Revisions dialog. i_RST_Revision-in progress. click Add: New. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress. Add Remaining Revisions on page 476. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line.rvt.7 On the Design Bar. the revision is locked and issued to the field. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. In general. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared.

13 Click on the value for Release Date. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Finish Sketch. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. click Revision Cloud. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and enter Research brace. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click above the elevator shaft. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs.If Visible is not selected. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. click Add: New. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. In most instances. 11 On the Design Bar. and enter 2/21/06. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 . Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click on the value for Description. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode.

If Visible is not selected. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click above the brace. Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser. click Revision Cloud. In most instances. 20 In the drawing area. under Sheets (all). 478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . double-click S. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revision is locked and issued to the field. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.In general. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select Activate View. yet as concise as possible. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. 16 Verify that Visible is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.2 . and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. When Issued is selected. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet.Stair Shafts Sections.

and enter Research door. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared. click Finish Sketch. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. 25 Click on the value for Release Date. yet as concise as possible. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. and enter 2/22/06. 26 Click on the value for Description. the revision is locked and issued to the field. click Add: New.23 On the Design Bar. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog. In general. Add Remaining Revisions | 479 . 28 Verify that Visible is selected. When Issued is selected.

Stair Shafts Sections. Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_Revision-in progress. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. and select Activate View. 32 In the drawing area. 35 On the Design Bar. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. click Finish Sketch. double-click S. The revision cloud is displayed around the door. click above the door. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets (all). Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser.2 . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. In most instances. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.If Visible is not selected. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

5 In the drawing area. 2 Right-click the view on the sheet. Because you chose to number by sheet. under Sheets (all). Working with Revisions In this exercise. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. and because the revision is the first in the project. 6 Click to place the tag. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category.Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. double-click S. Working with Revisions on page 481. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. and select Activate View. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Level 3 Framing Plan.1 . the cloud is tagged as number 1. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. and then issue the revisions to create a record. clear Leader. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. i_RST_Revision-in progress. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. Working with Revisions | 481 . you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. and lock it from further changes. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B.

Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 3 In the Project Browser.2 . click Revisions. under Sheets (all).Level 3 Framing Plan. you prevent further changes to the revision. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. 6 Select Issued for each revision entry.1 . You do this by issuing the revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. On the Settings menu.Stair Shafts Sections. 2 Select . you can no longer modify it. under Sheets (all). and click OK. double-click S. 4 Select . nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. double-click S.

Working with Revisions | 483 . 8 Proceed to the next tutorial. Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485.7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.

484 .

component properties.Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. Views and View Templates are not linked. As you create objects and the physical model. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view. Detail level. material properties. For example. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. geometry. quantity take off. The analytical model consists of structural components. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. To update a view. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. you can reapply the modified template. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. When working with the analytical model. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. if you save a template from a plan view. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. the template is still applied to the 3D view. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. loads and load combinations. Discipline. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. View Templates help standardize the look of all views. Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. The physical model that is used for documentation. 485 .

and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Training Files. 2 In the Select View Template dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to check member supports. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick.Analytical Checks In this exercise. The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below.rvt. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly. The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown.

A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. under the Analytical Model Settings tab. wall. Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. 4 In the Warning dialog click . select the Analytical Model Settings tab. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports. 5 Close the Warning dialog. Analytical Checks | 487 . This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog. Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed. or isolated). Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected.NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view. to view each warning.

Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show. 488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1.

The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. 9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show. Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing. Analytical Checks | 489 . Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings.

double-click Ground Level. under Structural Plans. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown. Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and H-4. H-3. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. E-3. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Foundation ➤ Isolated.■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. 14 On the Design bar. D-2. 10 In the Warning dialog. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. click Modify. D-4. click Close.

Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. 4 Close the Warning dialog. This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length. 3 In the Warning dialog. Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. click to view each warning. and double-click 3D. expand 3D Views.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. 6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 . Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models.

under Analytical Model. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. 7 In the Warning dialog. 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Close. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. and on the Options Bar. click .■ ■ Click Show. In the Element Properties dialog.

12 Press CTRL. and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown. Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit). click OK. Analytical Checks | 493 .9 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown.

Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. for Top Vertical Projection. The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected. a new training file is provided. You can save the open file if you wish. select Top of Column. Load Cases on page 494. The Warning dialog does not appear. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. you edit and add load cases. click . 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 14 Under Analytical Model. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed. In the next exercise. click OK. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check.13 On the Options Bar.

4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. select Dead Loads. and the Add button changes to Duplicate. you learn how to add new load cases. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. In the left pane of the Open dialog.The first table is the Load Cases table. click Training Files. select the Load Cases tab. Revit Structure provides a default number. Select an existing load case record in the table. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. The selected load case is copied in the table. The second table is the Load Natures table. Load Cases | 495 . 3 Click Add. you add or delete load natures. and rename it to Roof Hung. or delete load cases. In this exercise. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. you add. Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table. Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. then click Duplicate. In this table. 2 Click Add. 5 Under Category.rvt. In this table. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. edit.

Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. using the project coordinate system. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Hosts include slabs and beams. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. and wind loads to the model. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane.rvt. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you will be adding dead loads. and double-click View 1 . 6 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). perpendicular to the host’s work plane. expand 3D Views. A host for a load has its own work plane. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system.Analytical.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. live loads. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. and loads can be placed by default. In this exercise. and enter an appropriate name. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement.

under Analytical Model. TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. click the Model Graphics Style control. and click Hidden Line. 4 Select . draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. . 3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Area Load). and click OK. click Loads. 5 On the Options Bar. 9 Click the garage sloped slab.2 On the View Control Bar. Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. Adding Loads to the Model | 497 . select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection.

and double-click Level 2-Analytical. and on the Options Bar. Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Structural Analysis. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. select Project for Orient to. expand Structural Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click 13 Click OK. click (Area Load). 11 Select the load. .The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. click Modify. click Loads. expand Views (all). 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Structural Plans.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. and click OK. and click Element Properties. 4 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Right-click on the load you placed. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 . double-click Level 2-Analytical. select Area Load: Area Load 1. enter -0. Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. click Loads. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. click Modify to exit the Loads tool.0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter.

click Edit/New. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0. click (Line Load). click Modify. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. enter Wind Load. and click Element Properties. 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. 13 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. and click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load.11 On the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1.

double-click Level 2 . Adding Loads to the Model | 501 . 21 Select . 19 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. expand Views (all).Analytical. and double-click View 1 .■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case. under Structural Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Hidden Line.Analytical in order to view the added loads. draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown. expand 3D Views. click the Model Graphics Style control. 20 In the Project Browser.

22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 Draw a temporary grid as shown. click Grid. 502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

and will be deleted in a later step. 24 On the View tab of the Design bar. draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble. The elevation view opens. 29 Select . Adding Loads to the Model | 503 . and press DELETE. 27 Select the temporary grid. click Modify. click Framing Elevation. 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown. 26 On the Design bar.This grid is drawn for reference only.

504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . under Structural Analysis. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. and click OK. 34 Select the load. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. click . click Loads. click (Line Load). 35 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 On Level 2.30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other. select Workplane for Orient to. You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option.

9 Under Factor. Load Combination In this exercise. Load Combination | 505 . and click Add. click the Load Combinations tab. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. select DL1.4. 6 Under Factor. enter 1. 7 Under Case or Combination. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog.rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu. enter DL+LL.36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 10 Under Case or Combination. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. select LL1. Load Combination on page 505. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table.rvt. 8 Click Add. 4 Under Name. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software. enter 1. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.6. click Structural Settings. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section.

22 Click on the Load Combination table. 18 Under Case or Combination.5. 14 Under Factor. and click Add. 20 Under Factor. and click Add. 24 Under Type. Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. 21 Under Case or Combination. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . enter 1. select Envelope. 23 Select Row 2. enter 0. select WIND1. 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. enter DL+LL+WIND. and enter 1. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table.3. 15 Under Case or Combination. select Ultimate. 25 Under State. 17 Under Factor. select DL1.2.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table. select LL1. 12 Under Name.

select the file that contains the load table.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project. Transfer Project Standards | 507 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Scroll down the list of items. Transfer Project Standards on page 507. click OK. Transfer Project Standards In this exercise. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. Click Check None. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards. and select Load Types. 3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from.26 In the Structural Settings dialog. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save.

6 On the Structural Settings dialog. 4 In the Duplicate Types dialog.■ Click OK. click Overwrite. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. click the Load Combinations tab. 508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

you document the analysis by adding an annotation. expand Structural Plans. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.The load combinations are displayed. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise. and creating an analytical schedule. Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 . and double-click Level 2 Analytical. click Tag ➤ By Category. expand Views (all). NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509.

5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .4 Click the Area Load to place the tag. 6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown.

select Line Loads and click OK. Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Fx 1 and click Add. 11 Using the same process.Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 Under Available fields. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. 8 In the New Schedule dialog. and click View. right-click on the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 . under Category. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields. click the Fields tab. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Analytical. double-click Ground Level . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.3. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512. under Structural Plans. 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F . For this reason. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. In addition.13 Click OK.

3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. 5 Press TAB. 4 Press TAB. and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 . and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab.

setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 6 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514. Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project. a new training file is provided. 7 Proceed to the next exercise.The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. For example. ■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software.

the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets). it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members. despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined.Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 .

and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect. 516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model. Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments.rvt. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. 3 Click OK.

4 On the Toolbar. 5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown.Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. double-click Level 2. . click as shown. and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams. 2 On the Toolbar. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 . click .

under Analytical Model. The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. and on the Option Bar. 8 Click the slab. click . and on the Option Bar. click . for Vertical Projection. and then click OK. For demo purposes. NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. 6 Click the beam. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK.The dot located at the top of the beam. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . for Vertical Projection. select Auto-detect. select Top of Slab. under Analytical Model. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model.

The dot located at the top of the slab. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 . Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column. click . and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3. double-click Level 2 . right-click. 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. and click Zoom in Region. 12 In an empty part of the drawing area.Analytical.The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 11 On the Toolbar. represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model.

Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. and then click OK. aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall.14 Click the column. double-click Level 2. select the wall. The horizontal projection plane for the column. click (Join Geometry). and then select the column. for Horizontal Projection. 18 On the Toolbar. 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. click . The geometry of the column and wall are now joined. click . and on the Option Bar. select Auto-detect. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Analytical Model. 16 On the Tools toolbar.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.

under Analytical Model. 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall. for Horizontal Projection. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . The dotted green line represents reference plane 1. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. click . select Auto-detect. and select Chain of Walls or Lines. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. 21 Press TAB. 22 On the Option Bar. and then click OK.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned.

click .The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall. select Plane 1. 26 Click the upper wall. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown. and on the Option Bar. for Horizontal Projection. and click Zoom in Region. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In an empty part of the drawing area. and then click OK. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 . under Analytical Model. right-click.

The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. and click Zoom in Region. right-click. 29 In an empty part of the drawing area. double-click Section 3. 524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column.

Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. under Analytical Model. for Top Vertical Projection. and then click OK. for Vertical Projection. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam. click . The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab. and then click OK. click . select Bottom of Slab. 31 Click the lower wall.The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. select Auto-detect. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall. under Analytical Model.

click . 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . select Structural Plan: Level 2 . click . 39 In the Element Properties dialog. click No. and then click OK.Analytical. under Analytical Model. select Auto-detect. and then click Open View. 40 On the Design Bar. for Horizontal Projection. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. 38 On the Option Bar. 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). 36 In the Go to View dialog. and then click OK. In the Revit dialog. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown. double-click Section 3. select Exterior Face. under Analytical Model. You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. and on the Option Bar. for Analytical Slab Edge.The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). 35 Click the slab. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 42 Click the lower wall. and on the Option Bar. click .

and then click OK. click . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 . and on the Option Bar. select Top of Wall. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column. for Top Vertical Projection. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. 46 Click the lower wall.The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall. and on the Option Bar. under Analytical Model. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click . under Analytical Model. and then click OK.

The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line). Close any additional open windows. 528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click Level 3. 52 On the Toolbar. 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown. click . 49 Enter ZF.Analytical. double-click Level 3 .

Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. and on the Option Bar. ■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 . 55 In the Level 3 window. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam. 54 In the Element Properties dialog. Press TAB. under Analytical Model. and then click OK. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. select Auto-Detect. Extend each end of the beam as shown. and select the beam shape handle. for Horizontal Projection.53 Click the beam. .

530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . In the next exercise. a new training file is provided.Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged. Boundary Conditions on page 531. 56 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. 57 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click Zoom in Region. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Boundary Conditions In this exercise. 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns. right-click. select Fixed. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions. click Training Files. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown. clear Structural Foundation. double-click View 1 . Boundary Conditions | 531 . 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. 2 Enter ZF.rvt. click Apply. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. right-click. and then click OK. and click Zoom in Region. under Visibility. and for State. 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition.Analytical. Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. click (Point Boundary Condition). click Boundary Conditions. 9 In an empty part of the drawing area. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software.

under Structural Analysis. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. 532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and then click OK. click .12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. for State. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 On the Option Bar. select Pinned. press CTRL. and select the other symbol.

select Pinned. click . 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. and draw a zoom box around the foundation. 21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown. 18 On the Toolbar. Boundary Conditions | 533 . and for State. click (Line Boundary Condition). click Boundary Conditions. Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF.

that you confirm in the analysis software. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial. member relocation. and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure. In addition. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model. Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. In the next exercise. via an Application Programming Interface (API).22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. including structural plans. or member addition. The application programming interface (API) starts. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534. elevations. You can save the open file if you wish. For more information. All views. 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . a new training file is provided. are imported back into Revit Structure. sections. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software.

or schedule into AutoCAD.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. expand 3D Views. Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson.Atrium. sheet. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images.rvt. you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007. which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. 535 . section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can export a 2D view (plan. etc. elevation. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. and double-click 3D . In this tutorial. you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images. or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. Revit Structure.). Finally. click Training Files. maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects.

Under File naming. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. click Short. select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options. ■ ■ Click Options. select a folder on your local computer. do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only). Under Save as type. 3 In the Export dialog. 536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view.2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats.dwg). The existing file name is automatically shortened. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. 4 In the Export Options dialog.

NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save. and click Open.■ ■ Under Prefer. select AutoCAD Architecture objects. 5 On the Export dialog. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 . Click OK. 8 Navigate to the file location. View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007.

Revit Structure columns.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007. beams. 10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program. 11 In Revit Structure. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. the Revit Structure model appears as shown. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Select a beam as shown.

Under Save as type. 1 In the Project Browser. clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2. Under File naming. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in.dwg). click Long (Specify prefix for all exports). select a folder on your local computer. Under File name.Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. expand Structural Plans. Click Save. 3 In the Export dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats.rvt. i_RST_Export-in progress. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. and double-click Level 2.

and click Open. a warning dialog appears. click File menu ➤ Save. click Hidden Line Removal. 6 Navigate to the file location. 8 In Revit Structure. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. i_RST_Export-in progress.If the view was set to wireframe.rvt. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. On the View’s export mode dialog. When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007. the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .

select a folder on your local computer. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file. Select each sheet. click Save. Under Export Range. clear Views. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in.Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session. you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. Exporting Sheets | 541 . 2 In the Export dialog. 4 On the Export dialog. 3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. and click OK.

If the view was set to wireframe. View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 5 Close the Revit Structure file. and click Open. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise. On the View’s export mode dialog. a warning dialog appears. 542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. If you wish to save the changes. click Hidden Line Removal. navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file.

Exporting Sheets | 543 .When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture. they appear as shown.

544 .

In addition. Even though various types within a family can look different. material set. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Using the Family Editor. You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. In this lesson. There are. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. however. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based. and roofs are examples of these types of families. For example. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. The different file types become much easier to manage. because there is only one file to track. Walls.rfa extension. such as a curved beam. and when and how to use it. shape. each with a different size.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. thus the term family. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. they are still related and come from a single source. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . exceptions to this rule. 545 . Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. You also learn about the Family Editor. In this tutorial.

Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. exterior. and partition wall styles. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. for example. Host-based families have components that require hosts. generic.Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. floors. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. has wall types that define interior. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Standalone families include columns. and roofs. but you cannot create new system families. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. and beam. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. foundation. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . while many more are stored in component libraries. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. The basic walls system family.

custom step footing. The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. transfer them from one project to another.rfa extension. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. You create in-place families only within the current project. The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. Introduction to Families | 547 . and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project. and also a standalone pile cap family component. for example. You can load them into projects.Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families.

In this section. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. or you can load it using the Load From Library. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . In this exercise. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. you can drag it into the document window. and when to use it.Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. In the final exercise. such as plan. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. you learn when to use the Family Editor. To add a family to your project. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. it is saved with the project. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. However. how to access it. Load Family command on the File menu. After the family has been loaded in the project. elevation. you learn about the Family Editor. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. or 3D. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. how to access it. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. if you change the original family.

it will be available within the Type Selector. When the family opens. it opens within the Family Editor. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. open it in the Family Editor. 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project. you can click File ➤ Open. try to find the component that most closely resembles it. Within the Windows® environment. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. 4 If you cannot find the component you require. In this case. If you find a close match. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. if you have exhausted your external resources. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. you can double-click any file with an . Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . 5 Finally. and click Open. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. you will need a specific component for your design. 3 Next.When to use the Family Editor During the design process. modify it as needed. navigate to a family file. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. presume it is a bay window that you require. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network. 9 Save the newly defined family. To start a new family. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. and then load it into the project. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. such as newsgroups.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. With Revit Structure open. select the appropriate template. and click Open. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs.

550 .

rft file). Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (. you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile. When you create an in-place family. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. 551 . you create a custom. you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. In the second exercise. In the first exercise. and an in-place family for a step-footing. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib. a custom castellated beam. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family. Creating Custom Families In this lesson. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise. a custom titleblock. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile. not within the Family template (. Using the installed templates. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor.rft) template for use in other projects. you create it within the project file.

3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics.Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click. click Training Files. select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. 4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and press DELETE. 6 On the View Control Bar.rfa. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. Click Apply. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown. Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile. do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite. and click Zoom to Fit. and then click OK. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. click Dimensions and Reference Planes.

Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 . 11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane. Click the angle. click Dimension.Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). and click to place the dimension as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor inside the profile.

and click Zoom to Fit. 16 On the View Control Bar. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale. enter 66.13 Select the angled reference plane. 554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and press ENTER. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions. right-click. and drag them approximately as shown. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. 15 In an empty part of the drawing area. Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile.

Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 .18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. click Dimension. and press DELETE. Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side. Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar. and add a dimension as shown.

24 Press ESC.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown. click Ref Plane. Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar. 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Other. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. 26 On the Element Properties dialog. click Dimension. and then click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. click . click . select Not a Reference. Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar. 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. for Is Reference.

32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown. 30 Select the horizontal reference plane. click the dimension. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 . These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane. 31 Select the dimension line. and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. and press ENTER. 29 Press ESC. 33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown.The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements. and enter 0' 11/32".

35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown. 39 Press ESC. Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown. click Lines. 36 Click Modify. 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. and click Delete Inner Segment.Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar. 38 Using the split tool.

enter a for Name. 45 In the Parameters Properties dialog. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. under Parameter Data. and then click OK. 44 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data. and then click OK. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 .41 On the Options Bar. enter b for Name. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog.

Click Apply. for wr. 49 On the Options Bar. click Family Types. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. 560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and OK. ■ Under Other. enter 0' 2". 48 Select the dimension as shown. 51 In the Family Types dialog. select 2" X 6". do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. click Label. click Family Types. for a. do the following. and select wr. Under Other. enter 0' 4 1/2". 47 In the Family Types dialog.

Under Other. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. for b. and click Open. double-click Level 2. for b. Click Apply. enter 0' 2 1/2". Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail. 61 In the Choose Template dialog. Under Other. 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. click OK. 66 On the Options Bar. 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . do the following. 68 On the Design Bar. Under Family Types. 58 Click File ➤ Save. Under Other. and click Save. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide.■ ■ Under Other. 63 In the Project Browser. click Lines. enter 0' 2 1/2". and enter 2" x 5". click Browse. under Structural Plans. You are now in sketch mode. click the Imperial Library folder. in the Imperial Templates folder. click (Rectangle). and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). and then click OK. Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. 57 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 60 In the New Project dialog. enter 0' 2".rfa. click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. for a. 52 On the Toolbar. 65 On the Design Bar. click Slab. select Structural Analysis-Default. 62 In the New Project dialog. for Sr. enter 0' 5". and for File Name. select Rename. 64 On the Design Bar. Click Apply.rte. click Finish Sketch.

73 On the View Control toolbar. select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. select Fine. under Sections (Building Sections). 71 In the Project Browser. 562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. and in the Type Selector. For Detail Level. 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown. click Section. For Model Graphic Style.The slab is created. select 1" = 1' 0". 72 Select the slab. select Wireframe.

for Deck profile. click Edit/New. 79 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam. and on the Options Bar. select the slab project from the available files. select Edit for Structure. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ ■ ■ .Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. and open the new family file. click Load into Project. 80 In the Type Properties dialog. 82 In the Project Browser. click OK. select the new metal deck profile file. 75 On the Families Design Bar. The file should still be open. Click OK. click Training Files. double-click Section 1. Under Layers.rvt. under Construction. Under Structural Deck Properties. under Sections. click 77 In the Element Properties dialog. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam. click OK. 83 Proceed to the next exercise. The new profile is applied to the slab. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. If there are multiple files open. 78 In the Type Properties dialog. If it is not. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Layer 3. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . do the following. open the file from the saved folder location. 76 Select the slab.

Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. click castellated beam. e2 = Space between voids (web post length). . dt1 = Tee depth top beam. . 4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown.Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar. b = Length of sloped portion. ■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length. click Edit/New. click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam.

For b. enter 0' 4". under Construction. Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. enter 0' 5 1/2". click Rebar Lines. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565. For e2. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For dt1. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. enter 0' 3". enter 0' 3". Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise. Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft. For dt2. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. click OK.■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. click Training Files. and then click OK. Click Apply. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. enter 0' 6". Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar.

4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line. click ■ (Draw). 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. ■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop. ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar. and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar.

8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown. Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch. click Dimension. click Modify.■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop. 6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 .

9 Press ESC. select B. 11 On the Options Bar. Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown.Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. for Label. 12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown. 568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown.13 On the Options Bar. select D. for Label. select C. 15 On the Options Bar. for Label. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 .

for Label. 26 In the New Project dialog. click OK. enter Square. and click Save. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As. for File name. and click Open. for Label. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .17 On the Options Bar. select Structural Analysis-Default. 19 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder. 22 In the Save As dialog. 24 In the New Project dialog.rte. select C. 18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown. select B. click Browse. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. in the Choose Template dialog.

and click OK. and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. and select Rebar Shape: Square.rfa file is open. If it is not. scroll down the list of available shapes. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 32 On the Design Bar. click Slab. click Finish Sketch. The active rebar shape is highlighted. open the file from the saved folder location. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. The file should still be open. The Rebar Shape Browser launches.27 In the Project Browser. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 34 On the Families Design Bar. and be certain that the Square. You are now in Sketch mode. Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu. double-click Level 2. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. select the new project. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 . 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. 30 On the Options Bar. Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. positioned in the right-side of the drawing area. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog. under Structural Plans. 29 On the Design Bar. The slab is created. NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. click Lines.

40 Hover over the section view. 44 Select the rebar. 39 In the Type Selector. 42 Click ESC. select Rebar Bar: #10. select Near Cover Reference. for Placement Plane. Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar. 572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Detail Level: Fine. Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab. 41 Click to place the rebar.38 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. Creating In-Place Families | 573 . Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. you start with an incomplete foundation wall. 46 On the Design Bar. 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown.Notice that the rebar shape handles appear.rft) template. 47 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating In-Place Families on page 573. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category. you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (.

rvt. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 3 In the Type Selector. select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown. you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall. click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click the foundation wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Foundation ➤ Wall.Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing. 6 On the Options Bar. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser. 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files. The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. click .36" x 12".

select Pick a plane. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. 12 Press TAB. Make sure the entire footing is selected. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 9 In the Name dialog. 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . and click OK. click Create. and click OK. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select the bearing footing as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown. select Structural Foundations.

click Finish Sketch. sketch a solid extrusion as shown.Cast-in-Place Concrete. select Concrete . under Materials and Finishes. 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown. for Depth. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 15 On the Options Bar.14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. click Finish Family. 22 On the Family Design Bar. and select Multiple. click the value for Material. and then click OK. click OK. Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. enter -3' 0". 21 On the Design Bar. 576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Materials dialog. click Extrusion Properties.

Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 .26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown. 27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown.

28 Press ESC. 30 Select the wall foundation as shown. 31 Select the lower extrusion as shown. Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar. 32 Select the middle extrusion as shown. 578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Multiple Join. click (Join Geometry).

Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 . Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. click (Join Geometry).33 Select the upper extrusion as shown. click Modify. and click Multiple Join. 36 Select the middle extrusion as shown.

580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 Press ESC. 40 In the Project Browser.38 Select the upper extrusion as shown. click 3D Views ➤ 3D.

Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock. and your project data. and labels. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet. text. and enter -1/2" for Offset. You customize the titleblock with a new text style.36 x 24. The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 . Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click . 2 In the New dialog. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise.Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. select D . The titleblock has linework. and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. graphics. and click Open. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template.rft. 5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. 4 On the Options Bar.

and enter 4 1/2" for Offset. . click .Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. click 9 Enter 0 for Offset. and click . 10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown. 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 8 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. 12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown. 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown.

17 In the Type Selector. 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. click . 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. click Modify. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. enter 3/4" for Offset. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . select the second and third horizontal lines.13 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. select Wide Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 14 In the Type Selector. select Title Blocks. and. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click Lines. NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. 18 On the Options Bar. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset. 26 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. while pressing CTRL.

jpg. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. under Text. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu.The titleblock linework is now complete. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. click Import/Link ➤ Image. enter 3/8" for Text Size. select Company Logo. and click OK. click Edit/New. 2 In the Open dialog. 4 Zoom in on the logo. navigate to Training/Common. Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. and labels to your titleblock. text notes. you add a company logo. 6 On the Options Bar. enter 3/8" Bold for Name. click Text. and select Bold. 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. click . click Duplicate. 11 Click OK twice.

16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. and add an address and phone number as shown. and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 17 On the Design Bar. in the text box. and select the last text note. Press ENTER to add each new line of text. click Modify. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . and drag the text note down as shown. select Text: Text Note 1. 18 Select the drag handle. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc.

and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. address. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. click . and select the consultant text note. Add consultant name.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click Text. 586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Constrain and Multiple.

and click to specify the second copied text note location. Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the first copied text note position. 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. under Text. 32 In the Name dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 . click Edit/New. click . enter 3/16" for Name. click Duplicate.26 Move the cursor down 4''. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock. 34 Click OK twice. 29 On the Options Bar. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. enter 3/16" for Text Size. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and enter Sheet Number. click Text. select Text: 3/16". 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

and enter Drawn By:. and click to specify the label location. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. and click OK. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. and enter Checked By:. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.37 Draw a text box in the next space up. select Project Issue Date. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Label. and enter Date. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 41 On the Options Bar. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar.

enter 3/8" for Text Size. under Text. 50 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. click Label. 53 In the Name dialog. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. select Drawn By. and click OK. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 . and click to specify the label location. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 55 Click OK twice.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Checked By. click . enter 3/8" Label for Name. 52 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Center and Middle. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location.Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. select Project Number. 59 On the Options Bar. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Label: 3/8'' Label. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Sheet Number. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field.

and click to specify the label location. click Left and Middle. and click OK. select Client Name. under Text. enter 1/16" for Text Size. and click to specify the label location. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. select Project Name. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . 73 Click OK twice. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. 70 In the Type Properties dialog. click .63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. select File Path. Click Modify. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. click Label. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Edit/New. 71 In the Name dialog. select 1/16” Label. so that they are all aligned. and click OK. enter 1/16" Label. click Duplicate. 78 On the Design Bar. 68 On the Options Bar. and select any labels that may need to be moved. and click OK. Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 75 On the Options Bar. Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location.

6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Training D-Size Titleblock. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 In the Open dialog. select it. click Load.79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. text. and click Open. verify that default.rfa file. navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. 7 Click OK. click . 2 In the New Project dialog. The titleblock graphics. enter Name for Drawn By. and click OK. and labels are now complete. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. click Modify. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. and select the titleblock.rfa. and then click OK. under Other. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise.

For Project Status. enter January 1. enter Jane Smith. enter In Progress. 14 Click OK. For Client Name. For Project Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 . For Project Number. enter 2005-01. enter Office Building. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. 2005. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Project Information.12 On the Settings menu.

594 .

Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool. 595 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and web members. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss.Truss Building 18 In this tutorial. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise. click Training Files. bottom chord.rvt. double-click Roof. under Structural Plans. Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. To use the Truss tool.

2 On the View toolbar. click . enter 6' 0". for Truss Height. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. click . Under Dimensions. Click OK. for Bearing Chord. 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: Under Structural. 7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. select Top. 9 On the View toolbar. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. click ■ ■ ■ . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Truss.

Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 .The truss is placed between the columns. delete the extra flange at column location A1. Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span. 12 Using the same method. 11 Press DELETE. Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown. Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned.

click (Copy). double-click Roof. under Structural Plans. 598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 15 On the View toolbar.Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps. select Multiple. 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. 16 On the Options bar.

select the remaining trusses. under Structural Plans. click . 24 While pressing CTRL. 21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 19 On the Design Bar. Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 . double-click Roof. 20 On the View toolbar. click (Copy). Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser. 25 On the View toolbar. click Modify.18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. 23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2.

click Modify. .26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. 28 On the View toolbar. click 29 Enter ZF. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown. Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Truss. 31 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Design Bar.

34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown.32 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . select Top. 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown. for Bearing Chord. enter 6' 0". Under Dimensions. Click OK. do the following: Under Structural. Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. for Truss Height.

.36 Enter ZF. and D1.D4.C4. add trusses between columns C1. 38 On the View toolbar. 37 Using the same method. click 39 Enter ZF. 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar. click shown . and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss. Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 .

click Edit/New. Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters.42 Press DELETE. for Structural Framing Type. click Training Files. 3 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.500. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. You can save the open file if you wish. ■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.500. a new training file is supplied. enter 90. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. enter Howe Flat Truss . Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. for Structural Framing Type. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. click . and click OK. click Duplicate. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Truss. 44 Using the same method. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. and repeat for the remaining trusses. Under Bottom Chords. for Angle. 6 In the Name dialog. In the next exercise. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard.Short Span. 2 In the Type Selector. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. Under Diagonal Webs. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.

click 14 Enter ZF. and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web. 12 Using the same method. Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 . 13 On the View toolbar. The truss changes to the new type.8 In the Element Properties dialog. . . change the remaining short trusses to the new type. 10 On the View toolbar. double-click 3D. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss .Short Span. 11 In the Type Selector. draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser. click select the truss as shown. click OK. under 3D Views.

Click OK. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . for Structural Framing Type. double-click 3D. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. for Structural Framing Type. 16 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. 24 On the View toolbar. 20 In the Name dialog.500.500. click Truss. draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. click Edit/New. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. enter Howe Flat Truss . and click OK. Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser.Roof Span. click select the truss as shown. . click Duplicate. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK.Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click . Under Diagonal Webs. 17 On the Options Bar.

change the remaining long trusses to the new type. . select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 . 26 Using the same method.Roof Span. 25 In the Type Selector. 27 On the View toolbar. click 28 Enter ZF.NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange. The truss changes to the new type.

In the next exercise. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click . 2 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise. draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure. Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608. and then select the truss as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .rvt. Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape. under 3D Views. a new training file is supplied. double-click 3D.

Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 .3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances. click 5 Select the roof as shown. Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. (Attach/Detach Top Chord). All instances of the truss will be highlighted.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof. In the next exercise. 10 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the View toolbar. a new training file is supplied. click . and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.The top chords. View the custom truss 7 Select the roof. 8 On the View Control Bar. You can save the open file if you wish. Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile. vertical webs. 6 On the Design bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. click Modify. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.

3 Open Structural_Trusses. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. click Ref Plane.rft located in the Imperial folder. 6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 . and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown. Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. click the Training Files icon. Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar.Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise. click Dimension.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown. click Truss Top Chord. 10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown. Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar. 612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. 8 Using the same method.

Truss Bottom Chord.11 On the Design Bar. 12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown. 14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown. 15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown. click Truss Web. Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 .

You are now in the project file.16 Using the same method. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. Click OK. add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown. select Family Files (rfa). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in.rvt. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog. enter Custom_Truss. Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 19 In the Save As dialog. click Modify. For Save as type. 17 On the Design Bar. 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . navigate to a folder of your choice. For File name. click Load into Projects. Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

23 On the Design Bar. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . under Structural Plans. 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown. 27 In the Project Browser. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown. double-click 3D. select Custom_Truss. under 3D Views. double-click Level 2. 24 In the Type Selector. click Truss.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser.

click Grid. and a framing elevation. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .rte. and click Open. in the Imperial Templates folder. under Structural Plans. click OK. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. create column grids. you add braces to form the steel truss.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Browse. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser. select Structural Analysis-Default. You can save the open file if you wish. 4 In the New Project dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. double-click Level 2. In the next exercise. a new training file is supplied. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. Finally. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool. 30 Proceed to the next exercise.

(The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol.a. click Structural Column. 12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown. 17 Click the dimension. click Framing Elevation. and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown . select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49. Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar. 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2. enter 5' 0". 11 In the Type Selector. click Ref Plane. 15 On the Design Bar. and place approximately as shown. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 9 Select each grid line. and press ENTER. double-click Elevation 1 . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 .

19 Click the dimension. Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown. 18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown. Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar.The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. and enter 15' 0". 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 22 Press ESC. click Ref Plane.

The array is complete. 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 . 26 Drag the array to the right. Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click . 27 Enter 7 for array count. 29 In the Type Selector.24 On the Tools toolbar. click Beam. and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length.

create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. 33 In the Type Selector. Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. .30 On the Tools toolbar. create cross-braces by placing braces as shown. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. click Brace. When placing beams. click truss as shown. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. select 3D Snapping. Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . When placing braces. 31 Using reference planes as a guide.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 . then select the edge of the top chord as shown. 37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace. 39 Select the vertical ref plane. and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown. 38 On the Tools toolbar. click Ref Plane. click .36 On the Design Bar.

622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . under 3D Views. View the truss 41 In the Project Browser.40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown. double-click 3D.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 .The completed truss is displayed. 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice. You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial. 42 Click File menu ➤ Save.

624 .

These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options. In addition. 625 . you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. After you and the client agree on the final design. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can have multiple sets of design options. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. At any time in the design process. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In this tutorial. and each option set can have multiple schemes. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. For example.

The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. In the final exercise of this lesson. under Option Set. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). click New. you design each of the structural options. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After you create a design option. therefore. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. The client has asked you to create various options. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. the roof and structure systems must work together. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. In the second exercise. the only available command is to create a new option set. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can edit it. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. make your final design decision. With the second option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams.rvt. and delete the unwanted options from the project. click Training Files. you set up multiple design option sets. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . TIP In this exercise. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. 2 In the Design Options dialog. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. each with multiple design options.In this particular case. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. In the first exercise in this lesson. each is constructed for interchangeability. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

TIP To center the middle column. click 12 On the Options Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . In the following illustration. 7 In the Type Selector.3 Select Option 1 (primary). Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. and the third column centered between the two. and click Close. click Column. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). click Edit Selected. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 4 In the Project Browser. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. expand Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. expand Floor Plans. Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . click Modify. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. In this case. 5 On the View menu. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. By selecting Multiple. or add a dimension string between the columns. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. add three columns. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall.

Because of the size of the columns. click . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. using the same technique. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 18 On the View toolbar. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. When you are finished. 628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . they are difficult to see in this view. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 17 Zoom out and.

In it. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 21 In the Type Selector. select Round Bar : 2". click Beam. Adding a beam is a two-click process. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 . Zoom in on the upper right column. Next. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 23 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. The second click specifies the end of the beam. and click at its center to set the beam start point. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. double-click TOP OF CORE. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. you add the beams that span the columns. Use the following illustration as a guide.

click . and click the center point. zoom into the left column. 30 On the View toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 28 Zoom out. and select the center of the column to add a copy.25 On the Edit toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .

38 In the Rename dialog. under Option.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. under Option Set. 45 Under Roofing. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. name the option Louvers. click Rename. 46 Under Option. 43 In the Rename dialog. 41 Under Option Set. click New. click Rename. 36 In the Rename dialog. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. not a new option set. under Option. and click OK. under Option. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. click New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. select Option 1 (primary). and click OK. under Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . enter Beam for New. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. and click OK. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click New. enter Structure for New. 40 In the Rename dialog. under Option Set. enter Roofing for New. 32 In the Design Options dialog. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click Rename. click Rename. enter Brackets for New.

Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 53 In the Project Browser. it will resemble the following illustration. double-click ROOF TERRACE. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. select Edit Selected. 50 In the Design Options dialog. under Structure. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 52 Click Close. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. you create the second design option. click Rename. select Beam. 48 Under Option. When finished. under Floor Plans. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Option 2. and click OK. name the option Sunscreen. Under Now Editing. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 51 Under Edit.47 Under Roofing.

57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 56 In the Type Selector. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 58 On the Tools menu. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 .55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. click Align. select Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration.

on the Edit toolbar. 62 Select the beam and. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click Modify. The first click sets the move start point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.60 After aligning the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. The second click represents the move end point.

i_Urban_House-in progress. 68 In the Design Options dialog. 67 On the Tools menu. and click Save. 69 Click Close.rvt. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click Finish Editing. click . 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. you need this file in its current state. Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 . Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click Save As. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 66 On the View toolbar. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice that even before you close the dialog. which is visible by default. 70 On the File menu. name the file.

the other for beams. delete them after the rafter is in place. Sunscreen. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . do so now. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. a Louver system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you design each of the roofing options. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. each with multiple design options to pick from.In this exercise. With the second option. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. If you need to add dimensions. 10 Referring to the following illustration. expand Views (all). 2 On the Tools menu. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Louvers (primary). click Component. under Roofing. The first option. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. and double-click TOP OF CORE. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 4 Under Edit. 5 Click Close. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. In the next exercise. you set up multiple design option sets.rvt. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. Under Now Editing. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 8 In the Type Selector. The second roofing system. 3 In the Design Options dialog. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. select Rafter 2 x 10. click Edit Selected. open it now.

Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 . You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. click Array.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select 2nd for Move To. 15 On the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 16 On the Options Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. Enter 5 for Number. Select Constrain. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click . under Other. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 38' 6" for Length.

rather than entering 3' 3". enter 3' 3". you can enter 3 3. when the listening dimension displays. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press ENTER. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. TIP When entering a dimension value. For example. The space separates feet and inches.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. Select 2nd for Move To. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click . and. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. when the listening dimension displays. select Louver 2 x 6. click the Edit menu. 23 On the Options Bar. click Component. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 25 With the louver still selected. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 . 20 In the Type Selector. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. Enter 34 for Number.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and click OK. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. and click Array. 26 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and press Enter. 27 For the array starting point. under Other. and select the louver you just placed. enter 1’. Select Constrain.

click . 30 On the Tools menu. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 29 On the View toolbar. under Edit. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . The louver roof system is complete. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. click Finish Editing. 31 In the Design Options dialog.

39 On the Design Bar. Therefore. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. under Roofing. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. then you can modify it through the dimension. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. click Properties. and click OK. the top of the next column on the right. 33 Under Editing. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 34 In the Project Browser. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. In this case. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. You will fix this in a later step. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. click . and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 43 On the Design Bar. and double-click West. expand Elevations. and then click Close. select Sunscreen. Click OK. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Select the top of the left column. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. click Edit Selected. click Lines. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. The first two points define the ends of the line.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 . You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. and the third point defines the arc.

under Edit. 52 On the File menu. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 50 On the Tools menu. you designed each of the roofing options. then the center arc. Under Constraints. The arcs should connect. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 51 In the Design Options dialog. and then click Close. you need this file in its current state. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 48 On the Design Bar. click Finish Editing.44 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Constraints. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Finish Sketch. 49 On the View toolbar. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 46 On the Tools menu. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. In this exercise. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first option. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. click Save. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. click Trim/Extend. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The louver roof system is complete. The second roofing system. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click . Select the right arc. Sunscreen. 45 Click OK. a Louver system.

Managing Design Options | 643 . Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. under Views (all). tertiary. and delete the discarded design options. you select a design. 4 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. under 3D Views. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. 9 Click OK. click the Design Options tab. make it part of the building model. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. double-click Primary Option. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. secondary. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 5 Right-click each of the copies. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Managing Design Options In this exercise. expand 3D Views. 7 On the View menu. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. under 3D Views. enter Primary Option. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. and click Duplicate. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 11 On the View menu. do so now. click Visibility/Graphics. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. under Views (all). double-click Secondary Option. and last options. under Views (all). Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. under Views (all). After exploring the combinations. and click Rename. click the Design Options tab. 2 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. right-click {3D}.

specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). and click OK. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under 3D Views. double-click Tertiary Option. double-click Last Option. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. 15 On the View menu. 19 On the View menu. 14 In the Project Browser. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all).

The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. An alert is displayed. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. In your design options. under Structure. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. select Make Primary. 30 Under Option Set. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. click Accept Primary. but should be accepted as part of the building model.At this point. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 23 In the Design Options dialog. the beam option becomes part of the model. In this case. 29 Select Roofing. double-click Primary Option. click Yes. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Yes. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. the current primaries are no longer options. since you no longer need them. click Close. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 26 Under Option Set. 31 In the alert dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The set is deleted. 27 In the alert dialog. 22 On the Tools menu. 25 Select Structure. Managing Design Options | 645 . click Delete. This was the client choice for structural. Because the client has selected the design option. 24 Under Option. select Beam. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary.

made it part of the building model. 35 On the File menu. click Save. In this exercise. you selected a design. After exploring the combinations. and deleted the discarded design options. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.

In the final lesson. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. Comparison of alternatives on a site. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. and manage the links throughout the project.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In this tutorial. 647 . performance. modify their visibility. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. You position the building models on the site plan. This maximizes efficiency. In these situations.

and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. modify their visibility. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. and the other is a townhouse. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry. You position the building models on the site. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.Linking Building Models In this lesson. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. One building model is a condominium. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You link two building models to the project.

you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. Manual . Auto . 2 On the File menu.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. this option will place the link at a predefined location. in the Model Linking folder that you created. This option is grayed out. 8 Clear Read-only. RELATED See the lesson. 5 On the File menu. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. c_Condo_Complex. c_Townhouse. however. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.■ Auto . Otherwise. click Training Files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. click Open. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. this system is not exposed to the user. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. Select c_Site.rvt. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. right-click. click Close.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. with write permission.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. 4 On the File menu. and click OK. you can do so.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. and click Properties. select the three files. ■ ■ Manual . click Open. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and save the file there. All three files now reside.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. and open Common\c_Site. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . click Save As.

For Positioning. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 13 Click Open. select Auto . 11 On the File menu.Origin to Origin. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 10 In the Project Browser. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. Notice the blue detail lines. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). 650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . expand Floor Plans.■ Click Open.

click (Move). click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. 15 On the Edit toolbar. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The linked model moves as one object.rvt displays in the Type Selector. 17 For the move endpoint. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. After you select it. 16 For the move start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 . After you specify the location to move to. The Move command requires two clicks. The first click specifies the move start point.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model.

18 On the View menu. select Auto . 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.Origin to Origin. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and select c_Townhouse. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 21 Click Open. For Positioning.

the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. To rotate an object. click (Rotate). you first specify the rotation start point. In this case. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise.23 On the Edit toolbar. when the vertical line displays. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 . click to specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation.

click (Move).The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.

The Copy command works much like the Move command. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 30 For the starting point. The first click specifies the start point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. click (Copy).The townhouse is located within its required footprint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 . 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.

34 On the Options Bar. under Identity data. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. and click OK. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 37 On the View toolbar. click . click (Default 3D View). NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Townhouse A.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. for Name. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. click Rotate. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 32 On the Edit menu. 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . use the Move command to make any adjustments.

you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . click (SteeringWheels). you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. In this exercise. they were placed too low within the site topography. In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click and hold Orbit. click Save. In the next exercise.38 On the File menu. 2 On the SteeringWheels. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. After linking the files. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. do so before continuing. When you originally linked the files. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial.

When using the Align command. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. In this case. and double-click South. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. In the steps that follow. 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click to select the line. when it highlights. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. click (Align). 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you first select the plane you want to align to. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. To do this. 3 In the Project Browser. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. and click to select it. expand Elevations.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. and then select the plane that you want to align. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view.rvt. Click the Revit Links tab. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. under Views (all).

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

expand Schedules/Quantities. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. You have completed this tutorial. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. clear Itemize every instance. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. click Close. and then click OK twice. 13 On the File menu. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. click Save. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. under Other.8 Click OK. right-click Door Schedule. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 . 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 12 Select Grand totals. In this exercise. 14 On the File menu. and click Properties. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. select Family and Type for Sort by.

676 .

a floor slab.Project Phasing 21 In any project. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. footings. demolish existing construction. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. You create new phases. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. braces and footings) to phases. In this tutorial. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. and then add new building model elements. ■ ■ 677 . as well as a covered walkway. beams. and create plan views for each phase. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions. complete with schedules. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. Using Phasing In this lesson. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. For the client. In the second exercise. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. You create and manage 3 project phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. the galleria. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

use phase filters to control what displays in each phase. After you assign building elements to phases. Phasing Your Model | 679 . You create new phases for the project timeline. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. you create new phase-specific views. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project.Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work.

Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. and double-click Floor. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. existing. under Phasing. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. and the Phase Demolished value is None. When you create a new structural project. expand Views (all). 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. As you add new elements to the building model. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. the current phase linework is displayed as black. This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. demo. By default. 4 Click Cancel. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition.rvt. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. click . and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. expand Floor Plans. For example. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. or temporary) are visible in this phase. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

expand 3D Views. 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 12 Under Insert. which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south). and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. is visible in this view. Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. 10 In the Phasing dialog. click the New Construction field. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. 11 Enter Phase 1 (south). demo. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. on the Project Phases tab. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. With the phase Filter set to Show New. Phasing Your Model | 681 . click After. existing earlier phases.7 Click Cancel. Phase 1 (south). 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. and double-click 3D. Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). click Modify to clear the command. and click OK. and Phase 2 (north). Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project.

22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top.19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. and click Hide Object. 682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 20 In the drawing area. 21 On the View Control Bar. click Hide/Isolate. right-click one of the rectangular footings. and click Select All Instances.

clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. click . and openings. as shown. 32 Click OK. The continuous footing foundations. This filters out the steelwork. 30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Phasing Your Model | 683 . Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. select Existing for Phase Created. select Show All for Phase Filter. 29 On the View Control Bar. walls. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building.23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. and click OK. under Phasing. click . click Hide/Isolate. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected. 24 On the Options Bar. under Phasing. 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Filter dialog. are selected and are displayed in red. The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. and click OK.

the slab. you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. Because this is a renovation project. and the footings north of the galleria. the building is displayed as shown. You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. and click OK. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). 36 In the Element Properties dialog. After you create the views. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and Phase 2 (north) project phases. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). it requires separate plan views for the Existing. You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. under Phasing. 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. Phase 1 (south) with demolition. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click . the walls.

The line style of the new work. and click Rename. under Phasing. under Phasing. 44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. double-click Existing. 40 Click No. demo. shows as black. and click Rename. double click Phase 1 (south). You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. In a phase such as Phase 1. and click OK. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. Phasing Your Model | 685 . Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. new. under Floor Plans. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. 41 In the Project Browser. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 48 In the Project Browser. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. right-click Copy of Existing. right-click Floor. it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. enter Phase 1 (south). enter Existing. which will include planned demolition. under Floor Plans. 50 In the View Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. Because this is a phase-specific view. right-click Existing. and click OK. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. under Floor Plans. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. 46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. in phase 1. and click OK.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 In the Rename View dialog. 43 In the Rename View dialog. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click . and temporary) are shown in the same timeline. Because of this time relationship. under Floor Plans. select Existing for Phase. 42 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value.

59 In the Phasing dialog. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. double-click Phase 2 (north). under Floor Plans. Demolished. new or temporary. demo. When you demolish the host. 61 For the Filter Name. 60 Under Filter Name. under Demolished. click New. however. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing.52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. New. 64 Click OK twice. and Temporary. Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. The default phase filters are displayed. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. select the interior walls one at a time. select Overridden. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. In this case. click the Phase Filters tab. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. and enter Demo Red. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. 58 In the Phasing dialog. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. you demolish all elements hosted by it. 686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 56 Click OK. Demo Red. 53 In the Project Browser. Existing. click Filter 1. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. it is displayed as a dashed line. As you click each wall. and select Show All for Phase Filter. Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.

67 In the Element Properties dialog. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. in phase 1. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. the demolished walls are displayed as red. 78 Click OK. Phase 1 (south). select Existing for the Phase value. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. under 3D Views. 76 Under Graphics. Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. 80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and Show All for Phase Filter. Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 74 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 Click OK. shows as black. 70 Right-click on each of the copies. 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. 79 In the Project Browser. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Graphics. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. under Phasing.Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. Phasing Your Model | 687 . under 3D Views. double-click Existing. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. Because of this time relationship. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. double-click Phase 1 (south). 82 In the Element Properties dialog. Because you changed the override. Phase 2 (north). 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. under Phasing. double-click Phase 1 (south). select Shading for Model Graphics Style. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. The line style of the new work. 71 Name the views Existing. under Phasing. under 3D Views.

you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise. as well as 2 views of the building model. In this exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules.84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation. you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. 85 Repeat steps 81 . framing.84 Click OK. assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase. and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. you create column. 86 If you wish to save this file.

Enter Framing . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 4 Under Available Fields. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. select Structural Framing.Phase 1 for Name. and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar. 7 In the New Schedule dialog. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 . You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. Click OK. Select Length for Then by. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK. click the Fields tab. Select Grand totals.Phase 1 for Name. click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields. 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Structural Columns. Clear Itemize every instance. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Enter Columns .

right-click the new sheet. Clear Itemize every instance. Select Grand totals. select the following fields. Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser. enter Phase 1 . click the Fields tab. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Phase 1 for Name. expand Sheets (all). 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click OK. select Structural Foundations. click the Fields tab. Enter Footings . Select Grand totals. 14 Under Available Fields. 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Rename. Clear Itemize every instance. click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog.8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Next. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. Click OK. and click New Sheet. select the following fields. 19 In the Sheet Title dialog. Click OK. right-click Sheets (all). Click OK. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar.Structural for Name. 18 In the Project Browser. Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet. 9 Under Available Fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.

In this exercise. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. and click to place them.20 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 21 Under 3D views. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . and click to place it. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet. select each schedule one at a time. drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. expand Floor Plans. and move the column controls to adjust column width. 23 On the sheet. 22 Expand Schedules.

692 .

You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial. Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 . you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.

When you complete these changes. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. In this exercise. you specify options that define the model environment. the pad. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. After you create the perspective view. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. and create the perspective view that you want to render. and then render a final exterior view. add trees to the building site. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool. View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed. and open Common\c_Pool_House. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files.

9 In the Materials dialog. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. so you can change the render appearance for the material.Teak. 7 Click OK 3 times. select the wooden screen wall. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. for Materials. click Edit/New. Solid. (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall.Teak. 10 On the Render Appearance tab. The Wood . click Properties). 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Teak.3 In the drawing area. Solid. verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood . and on the Options Bar. The design calls for the use of a dark stained. click Replace. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . satin-finished teak. 5 Under Construction. Solid material is currently a light stained teak. for Structure. select Wood . click Edit.

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and review the material patterns. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit. but it is the closest material to what you want. for Structure. 16 Under Construction. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.Cast-in-Place Concrete. which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. select the pad. click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. for Finish. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. You do not want the medium gloss finish. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 . You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. click Edit/New. select Concrete . for the Structure [1] Material value. 20 Click the Graphics tab. select Broom Straight. 13 Click Update Preview. click (Element Properties). 19 On the Render Appearance tab. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. 22 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click . for Finish. and on the Options Bar. and click Update Preview. click <By Category>. select Satin Varnish. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. click Modify. 21 Click OK 4 times. 18 In the Materials dialog. and click OK.

31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. 29 On the Render Appearance tab.Aluminum. Anodized . 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog.Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions. the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. and click OK. By selecting this option. enter Metal . You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. select Metal . 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and click OK. review the material appearance (color and pattern). and click OK. and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall.Black. click Aluminum Anodized Black. click Replace. You create a black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click (Duplicate).Aluminum. for Name. 30 In the Render Appearance Library. 25 In the Materials dialog.

. select Region.Aluminum. and click 34 In the Materials dialog. 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 35 Click OK twice. Anodized . The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. for Curtain Wall Mullions. select the Material value. 33 In the Object Styles dialog. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 .Black. Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar. click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. 38 At the top of the Rendering dialog.32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. (Show Rendering Dialog). You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. select Metal .

and pad). 700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image. NOTE The smaller the region.40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. 41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly. mullions.

Adding Trees to the Site on page 701. under Display. The higher the quality. click Show the model.rvt. select Exterior: Sun only. after the rendering process completes. select Medium. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project. Several quality settings are available. on the Rendering dialog. The Rendering Progress dialog displays. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. for Scheme. providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. For Sun. select Sunlight from top left. 44 To display the building model. ■ ■ 43 Click Render. for Setting.42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 . 47 Proceed to the next exercise. the longer the rendering process will take. 45 Close the Rendering dialog.

In a later exercise. 2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. but any type and size can be used. the RPC model is used in the rendering.rvt. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. NOTE For simplicity. when you render an exterior view of the model. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Site. imperial components and units are used in this lesson.

they can be loaded from the Content Library. Adding Trees to the Site | 703 . NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio. click Site Component. and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector.) 6 In the Type Selector. near the walkway. select RPC Tree . similar to the locations shown. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. right-click in the Design Bar.3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.Deciduous : Red Maple . (Exact placement is not important. select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. and place 2 trees in the project.30'. See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help. as shown.

select RPC Tree . and on the Options Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select RPC Tree . and click OK. for New.42'. 13 Click OK twice.7 In the Type Selector. click (Element Properties). 704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Height.25'. enter Honey Locust . Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Rename dialog. enter 18'.Deciduous : Scarlet Oak . and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.18'.Deciduous : Honey Locust . You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Rename. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree. click Edit/New.

Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. click Modify.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View on page 705. Creating a Perspective View | 705 . you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.rvt. The perspective view displays. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. click Camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.

If the camera is not shown in the view. With the camera shown. and click Show Camera. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. Depending on camera placement. as necessary. right-click 3D View 1. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. and select the crop boundary. in the Project Browser.3 Zoom out. and adjust the field of vision. as shown. Creating a Perspective View | 707 . double-click Site. under Floor Plans.

708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day. under 3D Views. 10 Save the file. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click OK. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709. enter Exterior .6 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Exterior .Day to open the view. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.

c_Pool_House_in_progress. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and render a daytime view of the exterior. under 3D Views.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You then duplicate the view. double-click Exterior . modify render settings. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.Day. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 .Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.

4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 In the Rendering dialog. under Background. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 7 In the Rendering dialog. and click Rename. under Lighting. 8 Under Quality.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 3pm. select Sky: Cloudy. 5 In the Rename dialog. You create a location and time for the rendering. NOTE If a background image is required. see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. select Edit/New. enter Spring Equinox . 6 Click OK twice. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. You adjust cloud settings as required. for Setting. select Medium. 710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Sun. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. and click Render. In this case. select Spring Equinox. for New.Santa Monica.

Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. select Portable Network Graphics (*. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 . click Desktop.png). 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Export. click Show the model. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. For Files of type. click Show the rendering. Click Save. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. 10 In the Rendering dialog.9 In the Rendering dialog.

click OK. and click OK. 22 Using the same method. enter Pool Lights. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Flat Round : 60W . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Name. click New. click Dialog). press and hold SHIFT. you duplicate the view and change the settings.Day. and click Move to Group. To select a sequential list. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. under Lighting. under Group Options. and click OK. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Night. 21 In the Light Groups dialog.Night view open. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Night. 16 With the Exterior . and select the last light. enter Pool House Lights. 27 In the Rendering dialog. verify that Pool Lights is selected.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Day view to Exterior . under Group Options. right-click Exterior . for Name.120V to the Pool Lights group. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. click Render. add 30 :Sconce Light . under 3D Views.Flat Round : 60W .Exterior . select Exterior: Artificial only. under Ungrouped Lights. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.120V. and click OK. click New. dialog. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . for Scheme.Flat Round : 60W . 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. select the first light. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 25 Using the same method. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Flat Round : 60W . under Ungrouped Lights. on the View Control Bar. and click Artificial Lights. highlight 9 :Sconce Light .

31 Close the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. Rendering an Interior View on page 713. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 32 Save the file. and click OK. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 30 In the Rendering dialog. In this example. After the image is rendered. click Adjust Exposure. click Show the model. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. under Image. enter 4.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View | 713 . the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog.

RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view.rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. 714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . render the views. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and finally.

under Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. click Modify.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. the person’s line of sight. ■ (Rotate). Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. double-click Level 1. click Component. and on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the figure. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. Exact placement is not important. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. and place the component inside the pool house. select RPC Female : YinYin. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding RPC People | 715 . 5 On the Design Bar.

By default. under Identity Data. 716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. under Parameters. 13 On the Design Bar. for Render Appearance Properties. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Edit/New. 12 Click OK 3 times. 14 Save the file. on the Options Bar. select Cast Reflections. click Edit. click Modify. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. you can enable this option. In order to see the figure’s reflection.

Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 . Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. click Camera. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective.15 Proceed to the next exercise.

select Section Box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. right-click 3D View 1. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under Extents.The perspective view displays. and click Properties. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.

7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 11 In the 3D view. double-click South. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select the section box. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 . in addition to the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.

720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .12 In the floor plan view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. 14 In the 3D view. 13 In the South Elevation view. select the section box.

you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. To create a daytime view.15 Maximize the 3D view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 . and curtain walls. 17 Save the file. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. doors that contain windows or glass. and render the interior view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 7 Under Quality. 3 On the View Control Bar. 5 Click Artificial Lights. for Scheme. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 8 In the Rendering dialog. and click Rename. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. and click OK. you turn them off for this scene. click Render. 2 In the Rename View dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under 3D Views. and click OK. clear Pool Lights. select Draft. click (Show Rendering Dialog). These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. enter Interior . Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views.Night. under Lighting. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 4 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. You can specify a lower quality. After these settings are established.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

you must create a custom setting. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. select Edit.Day. select Curtain Walls. For more information on daylight portals. 3pm. right-click Interior . In this case.9 Close the Rendering dialog. 13 In the Rendering dialog. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog.Night. but the space will receive standard daylighting. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. the daylight portals can be turned on. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. for Scheme. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. The preset schemes are read-only. click Copy To Custom. You create a view for the interior during the day. For sunlit interiors. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . (Show Rendering Dialog). in order to turn on daylight portals. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. select Region. for Sun. select Interior: Sun only. select Spring Equinox . Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 . and click OK.Santa Monica. click 14 For Setting. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. and click Render. 17 In the Rendering dialog. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. see the Revit Structure Online Help. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. for Daylight Portal Options. By default they are turned off.

In the next steps. enter 10. 20 In the Rendering dialog. (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Image. enter 1. click Adjust Exposure. and close the Rendering dialog. select the column on the right.18 In the Rendering dialog. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. click Properties). For Saturation. Click OK. click Show the model. and on the Options Bar. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood.

click the dimensions for Size. For Bump. select Scale (locked proportions). and on the Options Bar. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 24 In the Materials dialog. for Resolution. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish.6. select Unfinished. select Based on wood grain. As size and DPI are increased. 23 With the column still selected. select High. You change the varnish setting. 28 In the Rendering dialog. the render time increases significantly. 30 In the drawing area. add a bump map to create texture. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. and click Render. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. enter 5''. select the crop boundary. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. For Amount. click OK. click (Show Rendering Dialog). For Width. and click OK. Click OK. For Rotate. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. 32 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Printer.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 29 In the Rendering dialog. under Output Settings. clear Region. enter 90. select Wood. 26 Click Update Preview. Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 .

A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. The walkthrough path is a spline.The rendered image displays. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. In a plan view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. or section view. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Usually. elevation. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. independent of the Revit Structure software. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and change unit formats as desired.rvt. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. proceeds through the dining room. verify that Perspective is selected. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Townhouse. on the Options Bar. If you prefer to use metric values. and double-click 1st Floor. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. click Walkthrough. click Training Files. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 . and click the tab in the context menu. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and ends in the far corner of the living room.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise.

728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. on the Options Bar. and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Finish. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.

14 Click . and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. and click OK. If it is not. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and click OK. Creating a Walkthrough | 729 . The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. select the crop boundary. for Width. 13 On the Options Bar. for Frame. and select the crop boundary. click the dimensions for Size.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and for Height. verify that Field of view is selected. 16 On the Options Bar. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 17 Click . enter 9''. on the Options Bar. 11 Under Change. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 1. enter 16''. 12 On the View menu.

3 In the Element Properties dialog.The walkthrough plays. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. and click OK. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click (Element Properties). under Extents. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730.rvt. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 2 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. under Floor Plans. clear Far Clip Active. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. press ESC. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. c_Townhouse. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 7 Click the third key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 . select Path. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. for Controls. and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip).

perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. click Edit Walkthrough. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. without opening Revit Structure 2009. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . specifying the number of frames. shading with edges. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. If you are unsure of what option to use. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and click OK. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select <Shading>. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. under Output Length. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 8 If you want to save this exercise. for Compressor. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 9 To play the walkthrough. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. enter 15. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 3 Under Format. under Walkthroughs. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. double-click Walkthrough 1. and click Save. reducing the size of the image.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. .rvt. shading. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. for Frames/sec. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. on the Options Bar. When you export the walkthrough. or rendering. The walkthrough is recorded. and click OK. for Model Graphics Style. hidden line. c_Townhouse.

a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.Roofs 23 In this lesson. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. and low sloped roofs. In this exercise. mansard. gutters. shed. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and soffits to the roofs that you create. In this tutorial. You do not need to create the work plane. In addition. including hip. In this lesson. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn how to add fascia. gable. 733 . you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. you learn to create several different types of roofs.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. expand Views (all). and click OK. 734 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click Training Files. 5 In the Go To View dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Ref Plane. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. select Name. and open Imperial\i_Roofs. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 4 Click OK. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. expand Floor Plans.

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. click the blue square on the witness line. and so on). This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.

14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 16 On the View toolbar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 736 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines.Next. select Chain.

21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Next. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. and then select the exterior face of the wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. press TAB. and select the second wall. 19 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . 17 On the Tools toolbar. The roof should resemble the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. expand Views (all). use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. press CTRL. expand Sections (Type 1). 18 Select the edge of the roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway.

click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. click model. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs .24 On the Options Bar.

verify that Defines slope is selected. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 . 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. and double-click Garage Roof. 3 In the Project Browser. sketch the roof footprint.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. i_Roofs.rvt. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and click Yes. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed.

click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. By default. 14 When you see the informational dialog. click (Properties). the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. select both slope definition lines. 13 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click the model. click Finish Roof.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741. 11 Press CTRL. Next. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. clear Defines slope. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. under Dimensions. 15 On the View toolbar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click to select all the walls. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. and double-click Level 3.rvt. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Next. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). press TAB. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. When you complete the roof. click Pick Walls. expand Floor Plans. clear Defines slope. sketch the chimney opening. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. i_Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

click Finish Roof. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs . select Defines Slope. 18 On the View toolbar. add new slope lines to the roof. 10 On the View menu. Next. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. 17 When you see the informational dialog. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click (Rectangle). 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. click Lines.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 8 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 9 Using automatic snaps. 13 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.

i_Roofs. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. close the roof sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Next. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. click Lines. click Pick Walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . expand Views (all).rvt. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. clear Defines Slope. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click (Pick Lines). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope.

9 On the Tools toolbar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. raise the roof 2' above the current level. 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click Roof Properties. 10 On the Options Bar.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. and click OK. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. select the left vertical slope definition line. Next. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment. 14 Under Constraints. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. using the following illustration for guidance. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click (Trim/Extend).

16 On the View toolbar.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. click Modify. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 . 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. join the two remaining walls to the roof. click (SteeringWheels). Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.

you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 23 On the Tools toolbar. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Roofs.

and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Next. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. click (Trim/Extend). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. you add a slope-defining line. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. expand Floor Plans. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. press TAB. clear Defines Slope. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 9 On the Options Bar.1 In the Project Browser. Next. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. click Pick Walls. and double-click Level 2. select the left vertical roof line. 10 To trim the first line segment. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 6 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 8 On the Tools toolbar.

and double-click 3D. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. and press ENTER. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. expand Views (all). Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 1 In the Project Browser. i_Roofs. expand 3D Views. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Roof Properties. expand Floor Plans. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 On the View toolbar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click 20 On the View toolbar. 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 13 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 16 Under Constraints. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. (SteeringWheels). 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. and click OK. click Modify. select Defines slope. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Before you can add slope arrows. Next. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Split Walls and Lines. click Ref Plane. To help locate the position of each split. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 9 On the Tools menu. 12 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 . Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. Next. 11 On the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.5 On the View menu. click Modify. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. add two new slope arrows. click (Pick Lines). click Slope Arrow. 14 On the Options Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 7 On the Options Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. clear Defines Slope. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset.15 to add the second slope arrow. you need to add two reference planes.

you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. click Modify. under Dimensions. click Edit. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. When aligning eaves. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. select both slope arrows. 18 Press CTRL. When eave heights differ. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. (Properties). you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. and click OK. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 Under Dimensions. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. click Align Eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). enter 12'' for Rise/12".rvt. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs .Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. (Properties). on the Options Bar. the adjacent eave heights must align. and then click OK. expand Floor Plans. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. and double-click Garage Roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. enter 6'' for Rise/12". i_Roofs. When you sketch a hip roof. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. The eave lines display with a dimension. select Defines Slope. select Slope for Specify. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 1 In the Project Browser. and click 19 Under Constraints.

11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. on the File menu. click Save As. select a method to align the eaves. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.Next. click Training Files. Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . 10 On the Options Bar. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.rvt. 14 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 13 On the View toolbar.

7 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. on the Options Bar. expand Views (all). (Properties). create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. expand Floor Plans. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 752 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and double-click Level 3. click Modify. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. expand Views (all). click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. click Lines. expand Elevations. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 Select the roof and. Next.1 In the Project Browser. and double-click North. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 6 On the View toolbar.

15 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. press TAB. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. on the File menu. click Modify. under Dimensions. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. click Finish Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Pick Lines). and then select Defines slope. click Save As. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 3'' for Rise/12". and select the remaining three lines. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click mansard roof. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . 17 On the View toolbar. and save the exercise file with a unique name.10 On the Options Bar.

You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 754 | Chapter 23 Roofs . double-click Roof. you add a roof to a building shell. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. After you add the roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise.

Because the walls are not continuous. 7 On the Tools toolbar. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. click (Trim/Extend). Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 . you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 5 In the drawing area. verify that Defines slope is not selected. and that Overhang is 0' 0''.4 On the Options Bar.

11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. for Type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.EPDM. double-click the section head to open the section view. Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. click Finish Roof. 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs .8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. select Steel Truss . as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.Insulation on Metal Deck . click Roof Properties.

18 Move the cursor down. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout.The roof has been created. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. under Floor Plans. click (Draw Split Lines). but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. double-click Roof. In the next steps. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 . and click to select it.

You create a split line vertically down the center. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 20 Using the same method. 758 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. move the cursor horizontally to the left. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. and select a point on the opposite roof line. (Add points). on the Options Bar. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. Next. The roof is now divided into 6 sections.

click (Modify Sub-Elements). You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 . You modify the points individually. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. 25 Using the same method. for the dimension. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. enter -2''. and press ENTER. Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane.In this exercise. exact placement of the points is not important.

click (Modify Sub-Elements). 27 Press and hold CTRL. and select all of the roof edges. including the interior edges of the roof regions. enter 4''. 29 On the Design Bar.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. for Elevation. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 760 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

36 View the results in the section view. click (Properties). select Variable. and on the Options Bar. 31 Select the roof slab.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. click Edit/New. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 35 Click OK 3 times. under Construction. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. By making the insulation layer variable. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. The entire slab is sloped. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. for the Thermal/Air Layer. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. for Structure. click Edit. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

you can easily create its fascia. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs .rfa. Creating Fascia. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. select Fascia-Built-Up. click Training Files. and soffits. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 37 If you want to save your changes. and open Common\c_Condominium. 5 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 3 Press CTRL. gutters. and click Open. gutters. and Soffits on page 762. and Soffits In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Gutters. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). on the File menu. you learn how to create roof fascia. and soffits in Revit Structure. After you create a roof.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. Gutters. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Creating Fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.

click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 8 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Duplicate. Creating Roof Fascia | 763 . 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and click OK twice.7 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. Creating Gutters on page 764. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. and click OK. enter Built-up Fascia.

3 In the Properties dialog. 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click Edit/New.Creating Gutters In this exercise. and click OK. select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. under Construction. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. and click OK three times. 10 Click to place the gutter. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click in the Value field for Material. . click (Properties).rvt. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. c_Condominium. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.

Creating Soffits | 765 . click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 3 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. expand Views.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click Pick Roofs. Creating Soffits In this exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. c_Condominium. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Roof. Creating Soffits on page 765.rvt.

and then select the soffit to join them. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). 7 On the Tools menu. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 766 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and double-click 3D. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.4 Select the roof. click Join Geometry. 8 Select the roof.

click Save As. on the File menu. Creating Soffits | 767 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.9 If you want to save your changes.

768 .

769 . You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Modifying. place. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. For example. In another exercise. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you also simplify the modification process. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. In this exercise. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. or with those working on a different project. and modify repetitive units. and typical office layouts. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. By grouping objects. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you not only simplify their placement. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial. When you make changes to a nested group.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. Creating. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. the host group is also updated automatically. You mirror one instance of the group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. all instances in the building model are updated. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. After you create a model group. hotel rooms. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create.

2 Click in the drawing area. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and double-click First Floor. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans.rvt. enter ZR.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 770 | Chapter 24 Grouping . NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.

and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Creating and Placing a Group | 771 .3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. click (Group).

and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. select the center control for the group origin. 772 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar.

Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. under Groups.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click Create Instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. right-click Typical Kitchen. expand Model. click Modify.

774 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. clear Copy. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. click (Mirror).14 On the Edit toolbar.

and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 775 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate).

as shown. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. and one rotated. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. one mirrored.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. click Modify. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

Modifying a Group | 777 .rvt. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise. click Save As. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. and click to select it.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. When you finish editing. press TAB to highlight the wall. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. you make changes to an instance of a group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save.

). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. click Modify. and click to select the wall. select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 8 On the Design Bar. and click member to group instance.). press TAB. press TAB.3 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door.). This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door. NOTE To display an excluded element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 7 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 778 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

click Door.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 779 . 11 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. clear Tag on Placement. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. move the cursor to the left. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. click Modify. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Wall.

21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 22 In the drawing area. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping . In edit group mode. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. click Edit Group. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. move the cursor up. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. All other elements in the model are grayed out. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify.16 On the Design Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall.

24 On the Design Bar. which acts as the host. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Modify. enter 3' 4''. click Finish. and click OK. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 28 On the group editor toolbar. and on the Options Bar. click 27 For Base Offset. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. created in an earlier lesson. under Constraints. (Element Properties). for Unconnected Height. you add the Typical Kitchen group. Nesting Groups In this exercise. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 25 Select the opening. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Nesting Groups | 781 . enter 7'. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

click Edit Group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.rvt. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 5 In the drawing area. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click (Add to Group). in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select the Typical Kitchen group. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click First Floor.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans. select the wall between the folding doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 783 . and each of the bifold doors. click Finish. 8 In the Project Browser.6 Press TAB. 7 On the group editor toolbar.

Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click First Floor. such as door and window tags. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you add door tags to a group.rvt. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. In the next exercise. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. such as text. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. and filled regions. under Floor Plans.

click to draw a rectangular region. 7 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 4 On the Options Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. and select a point below the left elevator. Creating a Detail Group | 785 .

click Text. 12 Enter Tile.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click to add an arc leader. 9 On the Options Bar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. as shown. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click OK. click (Group). enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 14 On the Edit toolbar. and select the text note and the filled region. and on the Design Bar. 786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point.

24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify. 20 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. under Groups. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators.18 On the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 . you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. expand Detail. double-click Second Floor. 21 In the drawing area. and click Create Instance. Because the detail group contains variables. 22 On the Design Bar.

click Tag ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.manner that a drawing component can be added. click Modify. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. double-click First Floor. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. as shown. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 5 On the Design Bar. clear Leader. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 11 In the Project Browser. select Door Tags. 8 In the Filter dialog. under Floor Plans. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 . Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. double-click Second Floor. click (Filter Selection). 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Check None. click (Group). and click OK. for Attached Detail Group Name.

This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. therefore. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 16 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Place Detail. and click OK.

click Modify. verify that Project is selected. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. verify that Same as group name is selected. and click Create Instance. 12 On the Design Bar. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). and click Open. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog.rvt. and expand Model.rvt. expand Groups. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. for Create new. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 . 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. A warning dialog displays. In this case. browse to the Desktop. under Groups\Model. 3 For File name.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. click OK. select 2 Bedroom Unit. accept the default template file. and click Save. and click Save Group. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. click Desktop. and click OK. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.

22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. When a group is converted to a link.rvt. 17 On the Design Bar. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Modify. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Use Existing. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. and on the Options Bar.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 18 In the Project Browser. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 20 On the Options Bar. click Bind. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. expand Revit Links. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. and the link is removed. click Remove Link. and click OK. 24 In the message dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. select the linked Revit model. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click Link. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. click Training Files. 792 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click OK.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful